Gasoline
UNLEADED gasoline
AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity
18.5 gal. (70 liters)
Recommended Engine Oil
API Service SL or above,
ILSAC GF-3 or above
Engine Oil Capacity with Filter
5.49 qts. (5.2 liters)
Engine Coolant
9.2 qts. (8.7 liters)
Tire Pressure (measured cold)
P225/60R16 : 30 psi
P235/55R17 : 30 psi
Compact Spare Tire Pressure
T125/80D16 : 60 psi
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III
or other brands meeting the SP-III speci-
fication approved by Kia Motors Corp.
Capacity : 11.5 qts. (10.9 liters)
Brake Fluid
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Power Steering Fluid
PSF-IV
GAS STATION INFORMATION
kia,
the
company
Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment. It
will give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the owner of
a Kia vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of questions about your
vehicle and the company like “What is a Kia?”, “Who is Kia?”, “What
does ‘Kia’ mean?”.
Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company in Korea.
It is a company that has thousands of employees focused on building
high-quality vehicles at affordable prices.
The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from to the
world” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syllable, a,
means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from” or “to come
up out of Asia to the world.”
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your dealer knows
your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians,
recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts and
is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with an audio system,
you will also have a Kia Integrated Audio System manual
explaining its operation. We urge you to read these publica-
tions carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure
enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models.
Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, along with
the various illustrations, may not all be applicable to your par-
ticular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia Dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2008 Kia Motors Corp.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in
whole or in part without the written consent of Kia Motors
America, Inc.
Printed in Korea
Foreword
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Knowing your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
Driving tips
In case of an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications
Consumer assistance, Reporting safety defects
10
Index
table of contents
1
How to use this manual / 1-2
Vehicle break-in process / 1-3
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-4
Introduction
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehi-
cle.Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual.
Especially, in order to prevent death or
injury, at the very least, you must read
the WARNING and CAUTION sections
spread throughout the manual, which are
easily recognized by their special mark-
ings listed.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information in
your manual.
Sections:This manual has eight sections
plus an index.Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You’ll find various WARNING’s,
CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this manu-
al. These WARNING’s, CAUTION’s and
NOTICE’s were prepared to enhance
your personal safety and continued satis-
faction with Kia vehicle.You should care-
fully read and follow ALL procedures and
recommendations provided in these
WARNING’s, CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s.
✽✽
NOTICE
ANOTICE indicates interesting orhelp-
ful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
13
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
• Avoid full-throttle starts.
PROPOSITION 65 WARN-
ING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehi-
cle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Introduction
41
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with
many high technology, electronically
controlled systems that help to
ensure your vehicle operates properly
and provides the performance that
you expect. These systems utilize
computers to monitor the operation of
various systems and components and
help to control their operation. These
computerized system operations are
wide-ranging and involve components
to reduce emissions, to continuously
evaluate the readiness of the airbag
and seatbelt pretensioner systems, to
determine when the airbag and seat-
belt pretensioner systems should be
deployed and then to activate the
deployment, and if equipped, to oper-
ate anti-lock braking, traction control
and electrical stability control to
assist the driver to control the vehicle
in difficult driving situations. These
systems electronically store informa-
tion that is useful to service techni-
cians when they need to diagnose and
repair these systems.
Additional information is stored only
when a crash occurs that results in
the deployment of the airbags or seat-
belt pretensioners. This type of data
storage is done by devices called
event data recorders (EDR).
After a crash event, the airbag and
seatbelt pretensioner computer sys-
tem, known as the Supplemental
Restraint System Control Module
(SRSCM) or Airbag Control Unit
(ACU), may record some information
about the condition of the vehicle and
how it was being operated. This infor-
mation consists of data related to
seatbelt usage and if there was diag-
nostic information in the airbag or
seatbelt systems at the time that a
crash occurred, and if the ACU
sensed that a crash of sufficient
severity occurred to require seat belt
pretensioner or airbag deployment.
To retrieve this information, special
equipment is needed and access to
the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. Kia will not
access information about a crash
event or share it with others except:
• in response to an official request of
police or similar government office,
or
• with the consent of the vehicle
owner or, if the vehicle is leased,
with the consent of the lessee, or
• as part Kia’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
Your rights with respect to the infor-
mation discussed above may vary
from state to state. In some states,
such information is considered pri-
vate, is exclusively owned by the
owner of the motor vehicle, and is not
retrievable or usable by another per-
son or entity.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
2
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Engine compartment / 2-4
Your vehicle at a glance
Your vehicle at a glance
22
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
OGH006002N
1. Door lock/unlock button......................3-9
2. Power window switches....................3-14
3. Outside rearview mirror control
switch ...............................................3-84
4. Seat adjust knob ..............................3-19
5. Hood release lever...........................3-80
6. Parking brake pedal.........................4-13
7. Parking brake release lever..............4-13
8. Instrument panel illumination ...........4-27
9. Steering wheel .................................4-17
10. Instrument cluster...........................4-25
11. Inside rearview mirror ....................3-86
12.Trunk release lever.........................3-76
13. Fuel filler lid release button............3-81
14. Seat................................................3-17
15. Master power door lock control......3-10
16. Master power window control lock..3-15
17. Brake pedal....................................4-10
18.Vent controls...................................4-53
19. Steering wheel tilt...........................4-18
20. Power adjustable pedal switch*......4-12
*: if equipped
23
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Driver’s Air Bag...................................3-57
2. Light control / Turn signals..........4-38/4-40
3. Instrument cluster...............................4-25
4.Wiper/Washer .....................................4-42
5. Ignition switch.......................................4-2
6. Seat warmer .......................................3-23
7. Front passenger’s air bag off indicator..3-59
8. Hazard.........................................4-45, 6-2
9. Rear climate control selection button..4-55
10. Climate control system.....................4-46
11. Shift lever............................................4-5
12. Passenger’s airbag...........................3-58
13. Glove box..........................................3-90
14.Trunk lid control button......................3-77
15. Audio controls*..................................3-99
16. Auto cruise controls*.........................4-19
17. Electronic stability control*................4-22
*: if equipped
OGH009001N
Your vehicle at a glance
42
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OGH057001N
1.Windshield washer fluid reservoir.......7-20
2. Power steering fluid reservoir.............7-17
3. Engine oil filler cap .............................7-13
4. Auto transaxle oil dipstick...................7-18
5. Air cleaner...........................................7-21
6. Brake fluid reservoir............................7-16
7. Engine oil dipstick...............................7-13
8. Radiator cap .......................................7-15
9. Positive battery terminal..............6-5, 7-26
10. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-14
11. Negative battery terminal ..........6-5, 7-26
3
Keys / 3-2
Remote keyless entry / 3-4
Immobilizer system / 3-7
Door locks / 3-9
Windows / 3-13
Seats / 3-17
Driver position memory system / 3-28
Safety belts / 3-30
Air bags-advanced supplemental restraint
system / 3-52
Trunk / 3-76
Hood / 3-80
Fuel filler lid / 3-81
Mirrors / 3-84
Interior lights / 3-88
Storage compartments / 3-89
Interior features / 3-91
Sunroof / 3-96
Antenna / 3-98
Audio remote control / 3-99
Audio systems / 3-100
Knowing your vehicle
Knowing your vehicle
23
The key code number is stamped on the
plate attached to the key set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will enable
an authorized Kia Dealer to duplicate the
keys easily.Remove the plate and store it
in a safe place. Also, record the code
number and keep it in a safe and handy
place, but not in the vehicle.
Key operations
➀ Master key
Used to start the engine, lock and
unlock the doors, lock and unlock the
glove box, and open the trunk.
➁ Sub key
Used only to start the engine and lock
and unlock the door.
➂ Transmitter
Used to lock and unlock the doors
and trunk (trunk can only be opened
with the transmitter when the trunk lid
control button located in the glove
compartment is turned on. See page
3-3).
KEYS
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key is dan-
gerous even if the key is not in the
ignition. Children copy adults and
they could place the key in the igni-
tion. The ignition key would enable
children to operate power windows
or other controls, or even make the
vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children.
OGH039001N
➀
➁
➂
OGH039002N
33
Knowing your vehicle
Restrictions in handling keys
When leaving keys with parking lot and
valet attendants, the following proce-
dures will ensure that your vehicle’s trunk
and glove box compartment cannot be
opened in your absence.
1. Unlock the glove box with the master
key and open it.
2. Set the trunk lid control button in the
glove box compartment to OFF (not
depressed). In the OFF position, the
trunk cannot be unlocked with either
the trunk release lever inside the car or
trunk open button of transmitter.
3. Close the glove box, and lock the glove
box using the master key.
4. Leave the sub key with the attendant.
The trunk and glove box are secured
because the sub key only allows the
engine to start and locks and unlocks
the door.
1GHA2004
WARNING
Use only Kia original parts for the
ignition key in your vehicle. If an
aftermarket key is used, the ignition
switch may not return to ON after
START. If this happens, the starter
will continue to operate causing
damage to the starter motor and
possible fire due to excessive cur-
rent in the wiring.
Knowing your vehicle
43
➀ Lock button
➁ Unlock button
➂ Trunk lid open button
➃
Alarm button
➀ Lock ( )
All doors are locked and the hazard
lamp will flash once if the lock button
is pressed. Also, the trunk is locked
and cannot be opened with the out-
side handle.
➁ Unlock ( )
Driver’s door is unlocked and the haz-
ard lamp will flash twice if the unlock
button is pressed once.Also, the trunk
is unlocked and can be opened with
the outside handle. All doors are
unlocked if the unlock button is
pressed twice within 3 seconds.
After depressing this button, the
doors will be locked automatically
unless you open them within 30 sec-
onds.
➂ Trunk lid open ( )
The trunk lid opens if this button is
pressed.If this button is pressed while
all the doors are locked, the trunk will
open, however it will remain locked
when closed.
If any door is unlocked, the trunk will
remain unlocked when closed.
When the trunk lid control button in
the glove box is OFF, the trunk will not
open or unlock even when the button
on the transmitter is pressed.
➃
Alarm ()
The horn sounds and hazard lamp
will flash for about 27 seconds if this
button is pressed.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
2GHN3330A
➀
➂
➁
➃
35
Knowing your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
the following occur:
- The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating distance
limit (393.7 inches [10 m]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, contact an author-
ized Kia Dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
Keep the transmitter away from water
or any liquid. If the keyless entry system
is inoperative due to exposure to water
or liquids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer vehicle warranty.
Operational distance may vary depend-
ing upon the area the transmitter is used
in. For example, if the vehicle is parked
near police stations, government and
public offices, broadcasting stations, mil-
itary installations, airports, or transmit-
ting towers, etc., operational distance
may be lessened.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Knowing your vehicle
63
Battery replacement
Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery
which will normally last for several years.
When replacement is necessary, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the transmitter’s center
cover (
➀
).
2. Replace the battery with a new one.
When replacing the battery, make sure
the battery’s positive “+” symbol faces
up as indicated in the illustration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
The keyless entry system transmitter is
designed to give you years of troublefree
use, however it can malfunction if
exposed to moisture or static electricity.
If you are unsure how to use your trans-
mitter or replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
For replacement of transmitters, see an
Authorized Kia Dealer for reprogram-
ming.
2GHN3101
CAUTION
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to malfunc-
tion. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
➀
37
Knowing your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an elec-
tronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
The immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key
and electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines whether the ignition key
is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-
der and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates auto-
matically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is designed
to give years of trouble free service,
however you should avoid expo-
sure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobilizer
system malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer sys-
tem to malfunction and should only
be serviced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the immobilizer system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the key or ignition key.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal from normally
transmitting
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave
this number anywhere in your vehi-
cle.
Knowing your vehicle
83
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobilizer keys near it.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
keys separate.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
39
Knowing your vehicle
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
• Driver’s door can be locked and
unlocked with the key.
• Turn the key to the left to lock all doors.
• Turn the key to the right once to unlock
the driver’s door and to the right twice
within 3 seconds to unlock all doors.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key.
• Once the doors are unlocked, it may be
opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
with your hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
To lock a door without the key, push the
door lock switch (
➀
) to the “LOCK” posi-
tion and close the door (
➁
).
✽✽
NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key, engage
the parking brake, close all windows
and lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the door is locked/unlocked multiple
times in rapid succession with either the
vehicle key or door lock switch, the sys-
tem may stop operating temporarily in
order to protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
DOOR LOCKS
1GHA2011
Lock
Unlock
1
2
OGH036908N
Knowing your vehicle
103
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, pull the door lock but-
ton out to the “UNLOCK” position (the
red part (
➁
) of the button becomes vis-
ible).
• To lock a door, push the door lock but-
ton (
➀
) to the “LOCK” position (red
part (
➁
) of the knob is not visible).
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(
➂
) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the front
door is pulled when the door lock but-
ton is in lock position, the button is
unlocked and the door opens (if
equipped).
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch and
when the front door is opened.
With central door lock switch
The central door locking switch is located
on the front door’s rest. It is operated by
depressing the door lock switch. If any
door is open when the switch is
depressed, the door will remain locked
when closed.
1GHA2013
Lock
Unlock
2GHA2014
OGH026005
Driver’s side
Front passenger’s side
311
Knowing your vehicle
• When pushing down on the front por-
tion (
➀
) of the door lock switch, all
vehicle doors will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear por-
tion (
➁
) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
• However, if the key is in the ignition
switch and any front door is open, the
doors will not lock by pressing the door
lock switch.
CAUTION
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehi-
cle is in motion to prevent acci-
dental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
WARNING
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
Knowing your vehicle
123
Impact sensing door unlock sys-
tem (if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock if a col-
lision that warrants SRS air bag deploy-
ment is detected when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
However, if the impact causes damage to
the vehicle electrical system or the
mechanical door lock mechanisms, the
impact sensing door unlock system may
not operate.
Rear door child safety lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located on
the rear edge of the door to the “lock”
position. When the child safety lock is
in the “lock ( )” position, rear door
will not open when the inner door han-
dle is pulled from inside the vehicle.
3. Close the rear door.
4.To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle.
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (
➀
) until rear door
child safety lock is unlocked ( ).
1GHA2015A
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed.To prevent
children from opening the rear
doors from inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used when-
ever children are in the vehicle.
313
Knowing your vehicle
➀ Driver’s door power window switch
➁ Front passenger’s door power window
switch
➂ Rear door (left) power window switch
➃ Rear door (right) power window switch
➄ Window opening and closing
➅ Automatic power window
➆ Power window lock switch
WINDOWS
OGH026006N
Knowing your vehicle
143
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls that door’s window.
However, the driver has a power window
lock switch which can block the operation
of the passenger windows.
If you notice buffeting and pulsation
(wind shock) with either side windows
opened, you should open the opposite
window slightly to reduce the condition.
CAUTION
• To prevent the power window
system from the possibility of
damage, do not open or close two
windows at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING
• Make sure hands and face are
safely out of the way before clos-
ing a window.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend face or arms out-
side through the window opening
while driving.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands and other
obstructions are safely out of the
way before closing a window
315
Knowing your vehicle
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the win-
dows in the vehicle. To open or close a
window, press down or pull up the front
portion of the corresponding switch.
Automatic power window
Depressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the second
detent position (
➅
) completely lowers or
lifts the window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or depress the switch
momentarily to the opposite direction of
the window movement.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1.Turn the ignition key to ON position.
2.Close each window and continue
pulling up on each power window
switch for at least 0.5 second after the
window is completely closed.
Automatic window reversal (When win-
dow is closed by the automatic power
window)
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance
and will stop upward movement. The
window will then lower approximately 5.9
inches (150 mm) to allow the object to be
cleared.
1GHA2301A1GHA2300A
Knowing your vehicle
163
Power window lock switch
• The driver can disable the power win-
dow switches on a passenger door by
depressing the power window lock
switch located on the driver’s door to
LOCK (pressed).
• When the power window lock switch is
ON, the driver’s master control cannot
operate the passenger door power
windows either.
Power window timer
(if equipped)
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the igni-
tion key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power windows
cannot be operated even within 30 sec-
onds after the ignition key is removed.
WARNING
• The automatic window reversal
feature (window lowers 5.9 inches
[150 mm] when a resistance is
detected) will only operate when
the automatic power window up
operation feature is used.
Automatic window reversal will
not operate if the window is
raised using the first detent posi-
tion (
➄
) on the power window
switch. Always double check to
make sure all faces, arms, hands
and other obstructions are safely
out of the way before operating
the power window.
• If an object less than 0.16 inch (4
mm) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reversal may not detect
the resistance and will not oper-
ate. Therefore, always check for
any obstructions before raising
any window.
317
Knowing your vehicle
Driver’s seat
➀
Seat adjustment, forward / back-
ward/height
➁
Seatback recliner
➂
Seat heater / ventilator switch*
➃
Lumbar support
➄
Driver position memory system*
■ Headrest adjustment (headrest
cannot be adjusted by a switch)
Front passenger seat
➅
Seat adjustment, forward / backward
➆ Seatback recliner
➇ Seat heater / ventilator switch*
■ Headrest adjustment (headrest
cannot be adjusted by a switch)
Rear seat
➈
Seat heater switch (left)*
➉ Seat heater switch (right)*
* : if equipped
SEATS
STOP
STOP
OGH026012N
Knowing your vehicle
183
For a seating position more comfortable
to the driver and front passenger, adjust
the seat forward, backward, up and
down.
WARNING
• Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the oper-
ation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Loose
objects might interfere with the
seat slide mechanism. Do not
place anything under the front
seats.
• The power seats are operable
with the ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never
be left unattended in the car.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the safety belt, or lap belt,
snug and low across the hips.
This position puts your safety
belts in the best position to pro-
tect you in case of an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary air
bag injuries including the possi-
bility of severe injury or death,
always sit as far back as possible
from the steering wheel so that
your chest is away at least 10
inches (250 mm) away from the
steering wheel.
CAUTION
• Power seats are driven by electric
motor. Stop operating when the
adjustment is completed.
Excessive operation may damage
the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seats consume large amounts of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power
seats longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control buttons at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
319
Knowing your vehicle
Driver’s seat adjustment
Forward/backward position and
height adjustment
Adjusting the seat forward and backward
Push the control button forward or back-
ward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the knob and the seat
will lock in the selected position.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the control knob.If the seat moves,
it is not locked properly.
Adjusting front height of seat cushion
Move the front portion of the control knob
up to raise or down to lower the front part
of the seat cushion.
Adjusting rear height of seat cushion
Move the rear portion of the control knob
up to raise or down to lower the rear part
of the seat cushion.
5GHA2238
5GHA2239
5GHA2240
Knowing your vehicle
203
WARNING
Driving or riding in a vehicle with a
front seatback reclined could lead
to serious or fatal injury in an acci-
dent. If a front seat is reclined dur-
ing an accident, the occupant’s hips
may slide under the lap portion of
the safety belt applying great force
to the unprotected abdomen or
neck or a passenger may be ejected
in a rollover. Serious or fatal inter-
nal injuries could result. Keep the
seatbacks in a comfortably upright
position whenever the vehicle is in
motion.
Adjusting the height of seat cushion
To raise or lower the seat cushion, pull up
or push down on the center of the corre-
sponding switch. Release the knob once
the seat reaches the desired position.
Adjusting the driver’s seatback
recliner
Move the lever forward or backward to
the desired angle and release the lever.If
the lever is released, seatback will lock in
place. After adjustment, make sure that
the lever has returned to its original
locked position.
5GHA2241
5GHA2242
321
Knowing your vehicle
Lumbar support
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch on
the side of the driver’s seat. Press the
front portion of the switch (
➀
) to increase
support, or the rear portion of the switch
(
➁
), to decrease support.
Move the support position up and down
by pressing the switch (
➂
) or (
➃
).
Driver position memory system
(if equipped)
A driver position memory system is pro-
vided to store and recall the seat and
outside mirror positions with a simple
button operation. By saving the desired
positions into the system memory, differ-
ent drivers can reposition the seat and
outside mirror based upon their driving
preference.
See page 3-28 for detail information.
Adjusting the front passenger
seat
Forward/backward position adjust-
ment
Push the control knob forward or back-
ward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the knob and the seat
will lock in the selected position.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the control knob.If the seat moves,
it is not locked properly.
OGH026014
OGH039901N 5GHA2248
Knowing your vehicle
223
Adjusting seatback recliner
Move the lever forward or backward to
the desired angle and release the lever.If
the lever is released, seatback will lock in
place. After adjustment, make sure that
the lever has returned to its original
locked position.
WARNING
In order to avoid unnecessary air
bag injuries including the possibili-
ty of severe injury or death, always
sit as far back as possible by mov-
ing the seat far back, while still
maintaining good vehicle control.
Serious injury or death may be
caused due to the deployment of
the passenger’s air bag.
5GHA2249
WARNING
Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
front seat is reclined, the occu-
pant’s hips may slide under the lap
portion of the safety belt applying
great force to the unprotected
abdomen or neck or a passenger
may be ejected in a rollover. Serious
or fatal internal injuries could
result. Keep the seatbacks in a
comfortably upright position when-
ever the vehicle is in motion.
323
Knowing your vehicle
Warming and ventilating the front
seats (if equipped)
Warming the seats
The front seats can be electrically heated
individually when the ignition switch is
ON. When the switch is ON, a number
ranging from 1 to 5 is displayed on the
switch (5 = warmest setting).
To turn off the seat warmer, set the
switch to 0.
The seat warmer turns off automatically
when the seat temperature reaches the
selected range and will turn on again if
the temperature drops below the select-
ed range.
Ventilating the seats
The front seats are ventilated by the
small vent hole on the surface of the
seats and seatbacks, when the ignition
switch is ON and the control switch is dis-
played in the range of -1 to -3.
Do not spill liquid such as water or bev-
erages on the surface of the front seats
and seatbacks. For the air vent holes
may be blocked and prevent them from
working properly.
Do not place materials such as plastic
bags or newspapers under the seats.The
air vent may not work properly as the air
intake can be blocked.
When the air vent does not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is no change,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized KIA dealer.
As you operate the control switch, you
will be able to notice the temperature
change after 3 to 5 minutes.For the tem-
perature is adjusted by the small air vent.
For more effective use, you may use it
with the air conditioner and heater.
OGH026017
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place blankets,
cushions or seat covers on the
seats while the seat warmer is in
operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the
seat warming components could
occur.
Knowing your vehicle
243
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting forward and backward
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
three different positions by pulling the
headrest forward. To adjust the headrest
backward, pull it fully forward to the far-
thest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and passengers, but also
helps protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (
➀
). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button
(
➁
) on the headrest support and lower
the headrest to the desired position (
➂
).
For best protection, adjust the headrest
so its center is as high as your ears. Also
adjust the headrest so its distance from
the head is as wide as your fist.
1GHA2245
WARNING
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. In particular, the
following types of passengers
should exercise extreme care:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
1GHA2246
325
Knowing your vehicle
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(
➀
) while pulling upward (
➁
).
Rear seat
Armrest
The armrest is located in the center of
the rear seat. Pull the armrest down from
the seatback.
You will find a storage cover and cup
holders (if equipped).
Warming the rear passenger seats
(if equipped)
Rear seats can be electrically heated
when the ignition switch is ON.
1. Pull the armrest down using the strap
provided on the armrest.
2.When the switch is ON, a number
ranging from 1 to 5 is displayed on the
switch (5 = warmest setting).
To turn off the seat warmer, set the
switch to 0.
The seat warmer turns off automatically
when the seat temperature reaches the
selected range and will turn on again if
the temperature drops below the select-
ed range.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head and neck
injuries, do not drive the vehicle
with the headrest removed or
improperly positioned.
Do not adjust the driver’s headrest
while driving.
1GHA2247
OGH026090N
OGH036320N
left rear seat
right rear seat
Knowing your vehicle
263
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the rear passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the event of
a collision.
For best protection, adjust the headrest
so its center is as high as your ears. Also
adjust the headrest so its distance from
the head is as wide as your fist.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (
➀
). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button
(
➁
) on the headrest support and lower
the headrest to the desired position (
➂
).
WARNING
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. In particular, the
following types of passengers
should exercise extreme care:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
1GHA2254
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place blankets,
cushions or seat covers on the
seats while the seat warmer is in
operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the
seat warming components could
occur.
327
Knowing your vehicle
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(
➀
) while pulling upward (
➁
).
Storing long/narrow cargo with trunk
closed (if equipped)
Pull the armrest down using the strap
provided on the armrest. Pull the cover
down while pushing the release lever
down.Additional cargo space is provided
to accommodate long/narrow cargo
(skis, poles, lumber, etc.) not able to fit
properly in the trunk when closed.
1GHA2255
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head and neck
injuries, do not drive the vehicle
with the headrest removed or
improperly positioned.
1GHA2108
CAUTION
Be careful when loading cargo
through the rear passenger seats to
prevent damage to the vehicle inte-
rior.
WARNING
• Make sure the engine is off, the
transaxle is in P and the parking
brake is applied whenever load-
ing or unloading cargo. Vehicle
may move if shift lever is inadver-
tently moved to another position.
• When cargo is loaded through the
rear passenger seats, ensure the
cargo is properly secured to pre-
vent it from moving while driving.
Unsecured cargo in the passen-
ger compartment can cause dam-
age to the vehicle or injury to its
occupants.
Knowing your vehicle
283
A driver position memory system is pro-
vided to store and recall the seat and
outside mirror positions with a simple
button operation. By saving the desired
positions into the system memory, differ-
ent drivers can reposition the seat and
outside mirror based upon their driving
preference.
If battery is disconnected, the position
memory will be lost and the driving posi-
tions should be restored in the system.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the transaxle lever into P while
the ignition switch is ON.
2. Adjust the seat and outside rearview
mirror to positions comfortable for the
driver.
3. Press the SET button on the control
panel.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or
2) within 5 seconds after pressing the
SET button. The system will beep
twice when memory has been suc-
cessfully stored.
The particular driver positions are mem-
orized in the button (1 or 2) selected.
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the transaxle lever into P while
the ignition switch is ON.
2.To recall the position in memory, press
the desired memory button (1 or 2) the
system will beep once, then the seat
and outside rearview mirror will auto-
matically adjust to the stored positions.
Adjusting one of the control knobs for the
seat or outside rearview mirror while the
system is recalling the stored positions
will cause the movement for that compo-
nent to stop and move in the direction
that the control knob is moved. Other
components will continue position recall-
ing.
To stop the position recall at any point in
the recall process, press the STOP but-
ton once. Seat and outside rearview mir-
ror position recalling will stop.
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OGH039901N
CAUTION
Use with caution when recalling
adjustment memory while sitting in
the vehicle. Press the STOP button
immediately if the seat moves too far
in any direction.
329
Knowing your vehicle
Storing and recalling with trans-
mitter
Storing with the transmitter
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK from ON
and lock all the doors using the transmit-
ter. The seat and outside rearview mirror
positions will be stored in the system
memory.
Driver’s position recalling with trans-
mitter
Unlock the door with the transmitter,
positions stored in the system memory
will be recalled automatically.
If using two transmitters, recalling times
may vary because stored positions in
each transmitter may be different.
Example) If doors are locked with trans-
mitter A and unlocked with transmitter B,
the positions memorized when unlocked
with transmitter B will be recalled and
may take slightly longer than if unlocked
with transmitter A.
Knowing your vehicle
303
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
• The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly.
• The seat belt must be adjusted to
the correct position.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver’s and
front passenger’s pre-tensioner seat
belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant’s body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts can be activated alone or, together
with the air bags, where the frontal colli-
sion is severe enough.
✽✽
NOTICE
The pre-tensioner seat belt is installed at
the front seats, and the sensor is
equipped inside the buckle, where pres-
ence of passenger is sensed by the fas-
tening of the seat belts. Therefore, pre-
tensioner will not activate if the passen-
ger is not fastened with the seat belts.
Likewise, it will activate if buckled even
without a passenger in the seat. Pre-ten-
sioner seat belt is designed to activate
when the seatbelt is in use. To ensure
the pretensioner seatbelts activate in
event of a possible seatbelt buckle
switch malfunction, the system is
designed to activate regardless of
whether a seat belt is in use or if no seat
belt use is detected within 6 seconds of
turning the ignition switch ON.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion.
➀
SRS air bag warning light
➁
Seatbelt pre-tensioner assembly
➂
SRS air bag control module
SAFETY BELTS
2GHB3002
1KMB3311A
➀
➁
➂
331
Knowing your vehicle
Load limiter
When the pre-tentioner activates, if the
system senses excessive seat belt ten-
sion on the driver or passenger’s seat
belt, the load limiter inside the pre-ten-
sioner will release some of the pressure
on the affected seat belt.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate once. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. All seat belts, of any
type, should always be replaced
after they have been worn during
a collision.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself.This must be done
by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
The pre-tensioner seat belt assem-
bly mechanisms become hot during
activation.Do not touch the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assembly for sever-
al minutes after they have been acti-
vated.
WARNING
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS
air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will blink or illu-
minate for approximately 6 sec-
onds after the ignition key has
been turned to the “ON” position,
then the light should go off.
• If the pre-tensioner seat belt is
not working properly, this warn-
ing light will illuminate even if
there is no malfunction of SRS air
bag system. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition key is turned to
“ON” , or if it remains illuminated
after blinking or illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, please have an
authorized Kia dealer inspect the
pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS air
bag system as soon as possible.
WARNING
When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated and the air bag is
deployed, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment and
are not toxic.
Although, it is harmless, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation and
should not be breathed for pro-
longed periods. Wash your hands
and face thoroughly after an acci-
dent in which the air bags and/or
pre-tensioner seat belts were acti-
vated.
Knowing your vehicle
323
Safety belt restraint system
We strongly recommend that the driver
and all passengers be properly
restrained at all times by using the safety
belts provided with the vehicle. Proper
use of the safety belts decreases the risk
of severe injury or death in accidents or
sudden stops. In most states, and in
Canada, the law requires their use.
All seats have lap/shoulder belts. Inertial
locks in the safety belt retractors allow all
of the lap/shoulder safety belts to remain
unlocked during normal vehicle opera-
tion. This allows the occupants some
freedom of movement and increased
comfort while using the safety belts. If a
force is applied to the vehicle, such as a
strong stop, a sharp turn, or a collision,
the safety belt retractors will automatical-
ly lock the safety belts.
WARNING
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, place,
service or repair the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadver-
tent activation causing serious
injury.
Always wear the seat belts
when driving or riding in a motor
vehicle.
WARNING - Safety belts
To minimize the risk of serious or
fatal injury in an accident, the driv-
er and all passengers should use
the appropriate safety restraints for
their age and size. The presence of
air bags does not change the need
to be properly restrained by a safe-
ty belt or size-appropriate child
restraint. In fact, air bags are
designed to work the best when
passengers are correctly restrained
in the vehicle. Be sure you are
familiar with the information in this
section, including the information
on infant and child restraints. Read
the safety warnings on the sun
visors of your vehicle also.
333
Knowing your vehicle
Since the inertial locks do not require a
collision in order to lock up, you may
become aware of the safety belts locking
while braking or going around sharp cor-
ners.
The rear safety belts use a special auto-
lock feature designed to allow a child
restraint to be used without an added
locking clip. These safety belt positions
normally lock only under extreme or
emergency conditions (emergency lock
mode).However, they can be adjusted so
that they remain in fixed and locked when
a child restraint system is in place. (Use
this auto-lock mode only to secure a child
restraint, never for passengers restrained
by the safety belts.) Page 3-46 gives
instructions on placing the safety belt in
the auto lock mode.
The driver’s safety belt can only operate
in the emergency lock mode.
Safety belts provide the best restraint
when:
• The seatback is upright.
• The occupant is sitting upright (not
slouched).
• The lap belt is snug across the hips.
• The shoulder belt is snug across the
chest.
• The knees are straight forward.
To help you remember to fasten your
safety belt, a warning light will come on
and a chime will sound. See Safety Belt
Warning Light and Chime on page 3-35.
WARNING
Always use the rear seat position(s)
to install your child restraint(s).
Never install a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger position,
as an inflating air bag could cause
serious or fatal injury to a child in
that position.
WARNING
- After a colli-
sion
• Lap/shoulder belt assemblies
may be stretched or damaged
when subjected to the stress and
forces of a collision.
• The entire restraint system
should be inspected following
any collision. All belts, retractors,
anchors and hardware damaged
by a collision should be replaced
before the vehicle is operated
again.
Knowing your vehicle
343
WARNING - Cargo area
(if equipped)
Passengers should never be
allowed to ride in the cargo area of
a vehicle. No safety belts are pro-
vided for the cargo area. Persons
riding in the vehicle without a fas-
tened safety belt are much more
likely to suffer serious bodily injury
or death during an accident.
WARNING - Twisted belts
A twisted or jammed safety belt
cannot restrain you properly. If you
cannot untwist or unjam the safety
belt, have an authorized Kia dealer
repair or replace it immediately.
Never drive or ride with a twisted or
jammed safety belt.
WARNING - Belt use
Safety belts must be used correctly
to work properly in an accident.
Each seating position in your vehi-
cle has a specific safety belt assem-
bly that includes a buckle and
tongue designed to be used togeth-
er.
For greatest effectiveness, follow
these guidelines in using safety
belts:
• Use the shoulder portion of the
safety belt on the outside shoul-
der only. Never wear the shoulder
portion under the arm.
• Never swing the safety belt
around your neck to fit over the
inside shoulder.
• Never wear the shoulder portion
of the safety belt across the neck
or face.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wear the lap portion as low as
possible. Be sure that the lap belt
fits snugly around the hips.
Never wear a lap portion of a
lap/shoulder belt over your waist;
it should always go over the
stronger area of your hips.
• Never use a single safety belt for
more than one person.
• The front seatbacks should
always remain in a comfortable,
upright position when the vehicle
is moving.
335
Knowing your vehicle
Safety belt warning light and
chime
If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fas-
tened when the key is turned ON or if it is
unfastened after the key is turned ON,
safety belt warning light blinks until the
belt is fastened.
If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fas-
tened when the key is turned ON or if it is
unfastened after the key is turned ON,
safety belt warning chime sounds for
approximately 6 seconds.
1GQA2083
WARNING - Safety belt
care
• A damaged belt may not give you
the protection you need in an
accident.
• Inspect your safety belts periodi-
cally for excessive wear or dam-
age. Pull out each belt fully and
look for fraying, cuts, burns or
other damage. Pull the safety belt
out and let it retract a number of
times. Make sure that the
lap/shoulder belts return smooth-
ly and easily into the retractor.
• Check the latches to make sure
they latch and release without
interference or delay.
• Never close the doors on any part
of the lap or shoulder belt.
• Any belt not in good condition or
in good working order should be
promptly replaced.
CAUTION
Never close the doors on any part
of the lap or shoulder belt. It can
damage the safety belt or buckle
which could increase the risk of
injury in case of an accident.
Knowing your vehicle
363
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten the front lap/shoulder belt:
1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.
2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out
from the retractor.
3. Insert the tongue plate (
➀
) into the
open end of the buckle (
➁
) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating the
belt is locked in the buckle.
4. Position the lap portion (
➀
) of the belt
across your lap as LOW ON THE HIPS
as possible to reduce the risk of sliding
under it during an accident. Adjust the
belt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up on
the shoulder portion (
➁
) of the safety
belt. The belt retractor is designed to
take up excess webbing automatically
and to maintain tension on the belt.For
your safety, do not put any excess
slack into the safety belt at any loca-
tion.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the safety
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
S2BLA371 S2BLA372 S2BLA373
➀
➁
➀
➁
337
Knowing your vehicle
5. Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.To raise the anchor position,
push the anchor up (
➀
). To lower the
anchor position, press the button (
➁
)
and slide the anchor down (
➂
). After
adjustment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.
To unfasten the front lap/shoulder
belt:
Press the release button on the buckle
and allow the belt to slowly retract.
MMSA30265GHN3900
WARNING
• The height adjuster must be in
the locked position when the
vehicle is moving.
• The misadjustment of height of
the shoulder belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt
in a crash.
WARNING
• The seatbacks should always
remain in a comfortable, upright
position while the vehicle is in
motion. The safety belt system
will provide the most protection
with the seatbacks in an upright
position.
• Never wear the shoulder portion
of the safety belt under the out-
side arm or behind the back.
• Never wear the shoulder portion
of the safety belt across the neck
or face.
• Wear the lap portion of the safety
belt as low on the hips as possi-
ble. Be sure the lap belt fits snug-
ly around the hips. Never wear the
lap belt over your waist.
(Continued)
Knowing your vehicle
383
Rear lap/shoulder belt
To fasten the rear lap/shoulder belt:
1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.
2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out.
3. Insert the tongue plate (
➀
) into the
open end of the buckle (
➁
) until an
audible “click’’ is heard, indicating the
belt is locked in the buckle.
4. Position the lap portion (
➀
) of the belt
across your lap as LOW ON THE HIPS
as possible to reduce the risk of sliding
under it during an accident. Adjust the
belt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up on
the shoulder portion (
➁
) of the safety
belt. The belt retractor is designed to
take up excess webbing automatically
and to maintain tension on the belt.For
your safety do not put any excess
slack into the safety belt.
(Continued)
• Never drive or ride with a twisted
or jammed safety belt. If you can-
not untwist or unjam the safety
belt, see the nearest Kia dealer
immediately.
• Never use a single belt to restrain
more than one person at a time.
Failure to follow these warnings
may increase the risk and severity
of injury in an accident.
OGH036906N OGH036907N
➀
➁
➀
➁
339
Knowing your vehicle
To unfasten:
Press the release button on the buckle
and allow the belt to slowly retract.
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
WARNING
• Never wear the shoulder portion
of the safety belt under the out-
side arm or behind the back.
• Never wear the shoulder portion
of the safety belt across the neck
or face.
• Wear the lap portion of the safety
belt as low as possible. Be sure
the lap belt fits snugly around the
hips. Never wear the lap belt over
your waist.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never drive or ride with a twisted
or jammed safety belt. If you can-
not untwist or unjam the safety
belt, see the nearest Kia dealer
immediately.
• Never use a single belt to restrain
more than one person at a time.
Failure to follow these warnings
may increase the risk and severity
of injury in an accident.
2GHA2122A
Knowing your vehicle
403
Proper use and care of the safety
belt system
To ensure that the safety belts provide
the maximum protection, please follow
these instructions:
• Use the belts at all times - even on
short trips.
• If the safety belt is twisted, straighten it
prior to use.
• Keep sharp edges and damaging
objects away from the belts.
• Periodically inspect belt webbing,
anchors, buckles and all other parts for
signs of wear and damage. Replace
damaged, excessively worn or ques-
tionable parts immediately.
• To clean the belt webbing, use a mild
soap solution recommended for clean-
ing upholstery or carpets. Follow the
instructions provided with the soap.
Do not bleach or dye the webbing
because this may weaken the webbing
fibers and allow them to fail when
loaded in a collision.
• Do not make modifications or additions
to the safety belt.
• After wearing a safety belt, make sure
it fully retracts to the stowed position.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in
the door when you close it.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-
der belt assemblies whenever possible
according to specific recommendations
by their doctors. The lap portion of the
belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND
LOW AS POSSIBLE.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen where
the fetus is located or above the
abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
341
Knowing your vehicle
Restraint of infants and small
children
To increase their safety, infants and
young children should always be
restrained by a restraint system
approved for their age and size.
Never allow a child to stand or kneel on
the seat of a moving vehicle.Never allow
a safety belt to be placed around both a
child and an adult or around two children
at the same time.
It is best for children to be seated in the
rear seats.
Many companies manufacture child
restraint systems (often called child
seats) for infants and small children. An
acceptable child restraint system must
always satisfy U.S.Federal Motor Vehicle
Sefety Standards. Make sure that any
child-restraint system you use in your
vehicle is labelled as complying with
those safety standards.
The child-restraint system should be
chosen to fit both the size of the child and
the size of the vehicle seat.Be sure to fol-
low any instructions provided by the
child-restraint system manufacturer
when installing the child-restraint system.
WARNING - Children on
laps
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms in a moving vehicle.
Even a very strong person cannot
hold onto a child in the event of
even a minor collision.
WARNING - Infants and
young children
• Infants and young children are at
much greater risk of serious injury
or death in an accident or sudden
stop if they are unrestrained or
restrained improperly. Follow all
instructions in this section of your
Kia manual and the instructions
that came on and with an
improved child safety restraint
system. The child restraint must
be correctly installed in the vehi-
cle, and the child must be correct-
ly installed in the child restraint.
• All children under 12 are safest in
the back seat.
• Never install a child or infant seat
in the front passenger position.
The baby could be injured or
killed by the air bag if it deploys in
an accident.
•
Never allow a child to stand or
kneel on the seat of a moving vehi-
cle. Insist the child sit down in an
approved restraint system.
Knowing your vehicle
423
Restraint of larger children
As children grow, they may need to use
new child-restraint systems, including
larger child seats or booster seats, which
are appropriate for their increased size.
A child who has outgrown available child-
restraint systems should use the belts
provided in the vehicle. When seated in
the rear outboard seats, the child should
be restrained by the lap/shoulder belt.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they may need to be returned to
a child restraint system.In addition, after-
market devices are available from inde-
pendent manufacturers which help pull
the shoulder belt down and away from
the child’s face or neck.
Larger children should use one of the
seat belts provided.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If safety belts are not properly
worn and adjusted, there is a risk
of death or serious injury to a
child.
WARNING - Hot metal
parts
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been
closed during warm/hot weather;
they could burn a child. Check seat
covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
343
Knowing your vehicle
Child restraint system
(if equipped)
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required by
law. This child seat or infant seat should
be of appropriate size for the child and
should be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. It is
strongly recommended that the seat be
placed in the vehicle's rear seat since
this can make an important contribution
to safety.
Children riding in the car should sit on
the rear seat and must always be proper-
ly restrained to minimize the risk of injury
in an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat.
You are required by law to use safety
restraints for children. If small children
ride in your vehicle you must put them in
a child restraint system (safety seat).
Child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts
or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt, or by a LATCH system (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured.For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car and
seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all
the instructions provided by the manufac-
turer when installing the child restraint
system.
ADAIRBAG
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat.
Should an accident occur and
cause the passenger air bag to
deploy, it could severely injure or
kill an infant or child seated in an
infant or child seat.Thus, only use
a child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
(Continued)
Knowing your vehicle
443
(Continued)
• Since a safety belt or child
restraint system can become very
hot if it is left in a closed vehicle,
be sure to check the seat cover
and buckles before placing a
child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the trunk
or fasten it with a safety belt or
LATCH system so that it will not
be thrown forward in the case of a
sudden stop or an accident.
• Children who are too large to be
in a child restraint should sit in
the rear seat and be restrained
with the available lap/shoulder
belts. Never allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always make sure that the shoul-
der belt portion of the lap/shoul-
der belt is positioned midway
over the shoulder, never across
the neck or behind the back. The
lap belt portion of the lap/shoul-
der belt must always be posi-
tioned as low as possible on the
child's hips and as snug as pos-
sible.
• If the seat belt will not properly fit
the child, an approved booster
seat in the rear seat must be used
in order to raise the child's seat-
ing height so that the seat belt
will properly fit the child.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the seat.
• Never use an infant carrier or
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback; it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Never allow a child to be held in a
person's arms while they are in a
moving vehicle, as this could
result in serious injury to the
child in the event of an accident
or a sudden stop. Holding a child
in a moving vehicle does not pro-
vide the child with any means of
protection during an accident,
even if the person holding the
child is wearing a seat belt.
345
Knowing your vehicle
Installing a child restraint system
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats. Never place a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger side air bag could
impact the rear-facing child restraint
and kill the child.
Since all passenger’s (except driver’s)
safety belts move freely under normal
conditions and only lock under extreme
or emergency conditions (emergency
lock mode), you must manually change
these safety belts to the auto lock mode
to secure a child restraint.
✽✽
NOTICE
The driver’s safety belt incorporates the
emergency lock mode only.
WARNING
• Do not install any child restraint
system in the front passenger
seat. Should an accident occur
and cause the passenger air bag
to deploy, it could severely injure
or kill an infant or child seated in
an infant or child seat. Therefore,
only use a child restraint system
in the rear seat of your vehicle.
• If the child restraint seat is not
anchored properly, the risk of a
child being seriously injured or
killed in a collision greatly
increases.
WARNING
• Before installing the child
restraint system, read the instruc-
tions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described, have the system
checked immediately by your
authorized Kia dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the instruc-
tions provided with the child
restraint system could increase
the chance and/or severity of
injury in an accident.
Knowing your vehicle
463
Placing a passenger safety belt
into the auto lock mode
The use of the auto lock mode will
ensure that the normal movement of the
child in the vehicle does not cause the
safety belt to be pulled out and loosen
the firmness of its hold on the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following proce-
dure.
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the safety belt
webbing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle.Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
E2MS103005 E2BLD310
347
Knowing your vehicle
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the safety
belt all the way out.When the shoulder
portion of the safety belt is fully
extended, it will shift the retractor to
the “Auto Lock” (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the safety belt to retract and listen for
an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting”
sound.This indicates that the retractor
is in the “Auto Lock”mode.If no distinct
sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the belt
as possible by pushing down on the
child restraint system while feeding the
shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the safety belt is
holding it firmly in place. If it is not,
release the safety belt and repeat
steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to
pull more of the safety belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press the
release button on the buckle and then
pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the
restraint and allow the safety belt to
retract fully.
MMSA3028
"Click"
MMSA3029 MMSA3030
Knowing your vehicle
483
✽✽
NOTICE
When the safety belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position, the
retractor will automatically switch from
the “Auto Lock” mode to the emergency
lock mode for normal adult usage.
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the shelf behind the rear seats.
1. Open the tether anchor cover on the
shelf behind the rear seats.
2. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the head-
rest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook to the
correct child restraint hook holder and
tighten to secure the seat.
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the pre-
ceding seven steps must be fol-
lowed each time a child restraint is
installed.
If the safety belt is not placed in the
“auto lock” mode, severe injury or
death could occur to the child
and/or other occupants in the vehi-
cle in a collision, since the child
restraint will not be effectively held
in place.
6GHA2025 OGH036330N
349
Knowing your vehicle
Child seat lower anchors
Some child seat manufacturers make
child restraint seats that are labeled as
LATCH or LATCH compatible. LATCH
stands for “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children”. These seats include two
rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two lower anchors and a
tether anchors at specific seating posi-
tions in your vehicle. This type of child
restraint seat eliminates the need to use
seat belts to attach the child seat in the
rear seats.
WARNING - Tether strap
If the tether strap is secured incor-
rectly, the child restraint seat may
not be restrained properly in the
event of a collision. Do not mount
more than one child restraint seat
to a tether anchorage, since the
anchorage can then fail in a colli-
sion.
2GHN2025A
WARNING - Child restraint
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or come away
causing death or injury.
WARNING - Child restraint
anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
Knowing your vehicle
503
There is a child restraint symbol located
on the lower portion of each side of the
rear seatbacks. These symbols indicate
the position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
LATCH anchors have been provided in
your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are
located in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There is no
LATCH anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located between
the seatback and the seat cushion of the
rear seat left and right outboard seating
positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-
compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH child
restraint, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the LATCH and tether
anchors.Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt the
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the
seat forward.Check to see if the anchors
hold the seat in place.
6GHA2127 2GHA2127/SBGQ03102
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the child-seat latch and LATCH
anchor during the installation.
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
351
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
seriously injured or killed in a colli-
sion greatly increases.
WARNING
When using the vehicle’s “LATCH”
system to install a child restraint
system in the rear seat, all unused
vehicle rear seat belt metal latch
plates or tabs must be latched
securely in their seat belt buckles
and the seat belt webbing must be
retracted behind the child restraint
to prevent the child from reaching
and taking hold of unretracted seat
belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
or tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the child
in the child restraint.
WARNING
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether or
to a child restraint lower anchor-
age point. The improper
increased load may cause the
anchorage points or tether
anchor to break, causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the rear center seating
position using the vehicle’s
LATCH anchors. The LATCH
anchors are only provided for the
left and right outboard rear seat-
ing positions. Do not misuse the
LATCH anchors by attempting to
attach a child restraint seat in the
middle rear seating position to
the LATCH anchors.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
LATCH attachments may not be
strong enough to secure the child
restraint seat improperly in the
rear center seating position and
may break, causing serious injury
or death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Attach the LATCH or LATCH-com-
patible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown
in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
Knowing your vehicle
523
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
➀
Driver’s air bag
➁
Front passenger’s
air bag
➃
Curtain Air bag
➄
Front impact
sensor
➆
SRS control module
➅
Side impact sensor
OGH026020N/OGH026021/OGH026257/1GHA2126/1GHA2127/2GHA2125/OGH026024/2GHA2128/OGH026023/1LDN2167/5GHN3001
➂
Side air bag
➈
Occupant classi-
fication system
➇
Front seat position
sensor
353
Knowing your vehicle
What your air bag system does
Driver’s air bag and front passenger’s air
bag are designed to supplement the pro-
tection offered by the safety belt in cer-
tain frontal collisions. Likewise, side air
bag and curtain air bags are designed to
supplement the protection offered by the
safety belt in side collisions. Safety belts
are designed to reduce the injury of the
driver or passengers in case of impact or
collision. No safety belt or air bag system
can completely eliminate injuries that
may be caused in collisions or impacts.
To help reduce impact on driver or pas-
sengers in any collision, safety belts
must be correctly worn.
What your air bag system does
not do
The air bag system is designed to sup-
plement the protection offered by the
safety belt system. IT IS NOT A SUB-
STITUTE FOR THE SAFETY BELT.
The importance of using
safety belts
There are four very important reasons to
use safety belts even with an air bag
supplemental restraint system.They:
• help keep you in the proper position
(away from the air bag) when it inflates.
• reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side
impact (vehicles not equipped with
side and curtain air bags) or rear
impact collisions, because an air bag is
not designed to inflate in such situa-
tions and even a side curtain air bag is
designed to inflate only in certain side
impact collisions.
• reduce the risk of harm in frontal or
side collisions which are not severe
enough to actuate the air bag supple-
mental restraint system.
• reduce the risk of being ejected from
your vehicle.
Knowing your vehicle
543
✽✽
NOTICE
Your vehicle’s Supplemental Restraint
System Control Module is equipped
with a recording device that may record
the use or status of the safety belt
restraint system by the driver and front
passenger in certain collisions.
WARNING - Air bags &
safety belts
• Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts pro-
vided in order to minimize the risk
and severity of injury in the event
of a collision or rollover.
• Always wear your safety belt. It
can help keep you away from the
air bags during heavy braking
just before a collision.
• If occupants are not wearing safe-
ty belts or correctly seated, they
cannot be protected, and thus
face serious injury or death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Driver’s and front passenger’s air
bags are designed to inflate only
in certain frontal collision, and
side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate in certain side
impacts. Frontal air bags will gen-
erally not provide protection in
side impacts (vehicles not
equipped with side and curtain air
bags) or rear impacts, rollovers,
less severe frontal collisions.
They will not provide protection
from later impacts in a multi-
impact collision.
(Continued)
355
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag system components
• The SRS air bag consists of the fol-
lowing components;
1. Driver's air bag module
2. Passenger's air bag module
3. Side air bag module
4. Curtain air bag module
5. Front impact sensors
6. Side impact sensors
7. SRS air bag control module
8. Driver's seat position sensor
9. Occupant Classification System
(Front passenger's seat only)
10. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator (Front passenger's seat
only)
11. Driver's and front passenger's
safety belt buckle sensors
12. Retractor Pre-tensioner
Assemblies
13. SRS "AIR BAG" warning light
• A diagnostic system that continually
monitors the system operation.
• An indicator light to warn you of a pos-
sible problem with the system.
• Emergency power backup in case your
car’s electrical system is disconnected
in a crash.
The SRS uses a collection of sensors to
gather information about the driver’s seat
position, the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s safety belt usage and impact sever-
ity.
The driver’s seat position sensor, which
is installed on the seat track, determines
if the seat is fore or aft of a reference
position. Similarly, the safety belt usage
sensors determine if the driver and front
passenger’s safety belts are fastened.
These sensors provide the ability to con-
trol the SRS deployment based on how
close the driver’s seat is to the steering
wheel, how close the passenger’s seat is
to the instrument panel, whether or not
the safety belts are fastened, and the
severity of the impact.
(Continued)
• If your vehicle has been subject-
ed to flood conditions (e.g.
soaked carpeting/standing water
on the floor of the vehicle, etc.) or
if your vehicle has become flood
damaged in any way, do not
attempt to start the vehicle or put
the key in the ignition before dis-
connecting the battery.
Disregarding this precaution may
cause air bag deployment, which
could result in serious personal
injury or death. If your vehicle is
subjected to flooded conditions,
before starting the vehicle, have
the vehicle towed to an author-
ized Kia dealer for inspection and
necessary repairs.
Knowing your vehicle
563
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the air bag inflation with two lev-
els. A first stage level is provided for
moderate-severity impacts. A second
stage level is provided for more severe
impacts.
According to the impact severity, seating
position (only driver) and safety belt
usage, the SRSCM (SRS Control
Module) controls the air bag inflation.
Failure to properly wear safety belts
can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
Additionally, your SRS is equipped with
an occupant classification system in the
front passenger’s seat. The occupant
classification system detects the pres-
ence of a passenger in the front passen-
ger’s seat and will turn off the front pas-
senger’s air bag under certain conditions.
For more detail, see “Occupant
Classification System” later in this sec-
tion.
CAUTION
If the seat position sensor is not
working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light ( ) on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate even if
there is no malfunction of the SRS
air bag system,because the SRS air
bag warning light is connected with
the seat position sensor. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illu-
minate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, if it
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 6 seconds, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized
Kia dealer inspect the seat position
sensor and the advanced SRS air
bag system as soon as possible.
AIR
BAG
WARNING
• Modification to the seat structure
can adversely affect the seat
position sensor and cause the air
bag to deploy at a different level
than should be provided.
• Failure to properly wear safety
belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury by causing the
air bags to deploy at a different
level than should be provided.
• Do not place any objects under-
neath the driver’s seats which
could damage the seat position
sensor.
• Do not place any objects that may
cause magnetic fields near the
front seat. These may cause a
malfunction of the seat position
sensor.
357
Knowing your vehicle
Driver’s air bag
The driver’s air bag is stored in the cen-
ter of the steering wheel.
HLZ206
OGH026021
WARNING
• Ignoring the SRS indicator light
(air bag indicator and passenger
air bag off indicator) can result in
serious or fatal injury if the air
bags occupant classification sys-
tem or pretensioners do not work
properly. Have your car checked
by a dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS warning light alerts you
to a potential problem.
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright in their seats
with their feet on the floor until
the vehicle is parked and the igni-
tion key is removed.
WARNING
• You must always sit as far back
from the steering wheel air bag as
possible (chest at least 10 inches
(250 mm) away from the steering
wheel), while still maintaining a
comfortable seating position for
good vehicle control, in order to
reduce the risk of injury or death
in a collision.
• Never place objects over the air
bag storage compartments or
between the air bags and your-
self.Due to the speed and force of
the air bag inflation, such objects
could hit your body at high speed
and cause severe bodily injury
and even death.
• Do not put stickers or ornaments
on the steering wheel cover.
These may interfere with the
deployment of the air bag.
Knowing your vehicle
583
Front passenger’s air bag
Front passenger’s air bag is stored in the
instrument panel on the glove box.
Since you cannot know which air bags
will deploy or from what direction, never
put any objects or ornaments on the
instrument panel.
Occupant classification system
The occupant classification system
detects the presence of a passenger in
the front passenger's seat and will turn
off the front passenger's air bag under
certain conditions.
The occupant classification system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger's air bag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
Main components of occupant classi-
fication system
• A detection device located within the
front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag systems
(both front passenger’s front and side
air bag only) should be activated or
deactivated.
• A warning light located on the instru-
ment panel which illuminates the
words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
passenger air bag system is deactivat-
ed.
• The instrument panel air bag warning
light is interconnected with the occu-
pant classification system.
5GHN3001
OGH026257
HLZ2121
359
Knowing your vehicle
If there is no passenger in the front pas-
senger seat or if the passenger in the
front passenger's seat is very small,
(such as a child), the front PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator may go ON.
When this indicator is ON, the front pas-
senger's air bag will not deploy.
The front passenger’s side air bag will
not deploy if the front seat is unoccupied.
The front passenger’s side air bag may
deploy if the front seat is occupied by a
small occupant.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person's legs comfort-
ably extended, feet on the floor, and
wearing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air bag
and the safety belt.
• The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which can
defeat the detection system. These
include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front
of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or rest-
ing them on other locations which
reduce the passenger weight on the
front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
• The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates after the ignition
key is turned to the "ON" position or
after the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is unoccupied or is
occupied by very small person, or is
occupied by someone who is improp-
erly seated, the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator will remain illumi-
nated. If the front passenger seat is
occupied by someone of adult size and
body shape, the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator will turn off after 6
seconds.
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates, the front passen-
ger's air bag will not deploy.
The front passenger’s side air bag will
not deploy if the front seat is unoccu-
pied.
The front passenger’s side air bag may
deploy if the front seat is occupied by a
small occupant.
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is not illuminated, the front
passenger front air bag and front pas-
senger side air bag may deploy in
either a side or frontal collision.
OGH036367N
The location of OCS warning indicator
Knowing your vehicle
603
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant
classification system
Condition detected by
the occupant classifi-
cation system
1. Adult *
1
2. Child*
2
or child
restraint system
3. Unoccupied
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
"PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator
light
AIR BAG
warning light
Front passenger
front air bag
Indicator/Warning light Device
*
1
The system detects a person who is generally adult size as an adult, thus allowing the pas-
senger air bag to deploy. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system
may detect their body shape as that of a child, thus preventing air bag deployment.
*
2
When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat,
the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her body shape or seating
position, thus permitting air bag deployment.
CAUTION
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates or blinks continu-
ously when a person of adult size sits in the front passenger's seat, it could
be because that person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn
the vehicle off, make sure the seat back is not reclined, have the passenger
center on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended, and the safety
belt properly positioned. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position long enough to allow the system to detect the person and acti-
vate the passenger air bag.
CAUTION
If the occupant classification sys-
tem is not working properly, the air
bag warning light ( ) on the
instrument panel will illuminate
because the passenger’s air bag is
connected with the occupant clas-
sification system. If there is a mal-
function of the occupant classifica-
tion system, the "Passenger Air bag
Off" indicator will not illuminate and
the front passenger's air bag will
deploy in frontal crashes even if
there is child or no occupant in the
front passenger's seat.
Have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the occupant classification
system with the SRS air bag system
as soon as possible if any of follow-
ing occur;
• The SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the igni-
tion key is turned to "ON" posi-
tion.
(Continued)
AIR
BAG
361
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant clas-
sification system, do not install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger seat. The child could
be severely injured or killed if the
air bag deploys. Children are
afforded the most protection in
the event of an accident when
they are restrained by the proper
restraint system in the rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator is illuminated
when the front passenger's seat
is occupied by a person of adult
size who is seated properly, or if
the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator" is not illuminated when
the front passenger's seat is
unoccupied or occupied by a very
small person, the occupant clas-
sification system is not working
properly. Have your vehicle imme-
diately inspected by your Kia
dealer if the occupant classifica-
tion system is not working prop-
erly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a low weight adult is seated in
the front passenger seat, the
occupant classification system
may or may not turn off the right
front passenger air bag, depend-
ing upon the person's seating
position and body type. Everyone
in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly -- whether or
not there is an air bag for that per-
son.
• If the front seat passenger
changes their seating position
(for example, by not sitting
upright, by sitting on the edge of
the seat, or by otherwise being
out of position), the "PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may
be turned on, and the passenger
air bag may not deploy in a colli-
sion. Always be sure to sit prop-
erly in the front passenger seat
and wear the safety belt properly
and do not do any of the follow-
ing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated after illumi-
nating or blinking for approxi-
mately 6 seconds.
• The SRS air bag warning light illu-
minates while the vehicle is being
driven.
Knowing your vehicle
623
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
1KMN3666
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the center con-
sole.
- Never sit on one side of the front
passenger seat.
- Always sit in a proper seating
position.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
(Continued)
1KMN3661
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
(Continued)
363
Knowing your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• If luggage or other objects are placed
on the front passenger's seat or if the
temperature of the seat changes while
the seat is unoccupied, the "PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may
blink. These conditions do not indi-
cate a problem.
• Do not put heavy objects on the front
passenger's seat. This may cause front
passenger air bag deployment in the
event of an accident, thus increasing
your repair costs.
WARNING
• The front seat passenger air bag
is much larger than the steering
wheel air bag and inflates with
considerably more force. It can
seriously hurt or kill a passenger
who is not in the proper position
and wearing the safety belt prop-
erly.The front passengers should
always move their seats as far
back as practical and sit back in
their seats.
• It is essential that the front pas-
senger always wears their safety
belts, even when the vehicle is
moving in a parking lot or up a
driveway into garage.
• If the driver brakes the vehicle
heavily prior to an impact, unbelt-
ed occupants will be thrown for-
ward. If the front passenger is not
wearing a safety belt, he/she will
be directly in front of the storage
compartment when deployment
occurs. In that situation, serious
injury or death is possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Manufacturers are required by
government regulations to pro-
vide a contact point concerning
modifications to the vehicle for
persons with disabilities, which
modifications may affect the vehi-
cle’s advanced air bag system.
That contact is Kia’s toll-free
Consumer Assistance center at 1-
800-333-4KIA. However, Kia does
not endorse nor will it support
any changes to any part or struc-
ture of the vehicle that could
affect the advanced air bag sys-
tem, including the occupant clas-
sification system. Specifically, the
front passenger seat, dashboard
or door should not be replaced
except by an authorized Kia deal-
er using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replace-
ment or modification could
adversely affect the operation of
the occupant classification sys-
tem and your advanced air bags.
(Continued)
(Continued)
For the same reason, do not
attach anything to the seat, dash-
board or door, even temporarily. If
the system is adversely affected,
it could cause severe personal
injuries or death in a collision.
• Do not place sharp objects on the
front passenger seat. These can
damage the occupant classifica-
tion system, if they puncture the
seat cushion.
• Do not install accessory seat cov-
ers on the front seats, since these
will interfere with proper sensor
operation.
Knowing your vehicle
643
Side air bag (if equipped)
Side air bags are stored in the left side of
the driver’s seat, right side of the front
passenger’s seat and left and right sides
of the rear seats.
Side air bags are designed to deploy only
during certain side impact collisions
depending on the crash severity, angle,
speed and impact. The side air bags are
not designed to deploy in all side impact
situations.
WARNING
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers for the vehicle equipped
with side air bags.
Use of seat covers could interfere
with side air bag deployment.
If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer. Inform them that your
vehicle is equipped with side air
bags and an occupant detection
system.
• Do not make modifications or
additions to the seats. If inappro-
priate seats are used, unexpected
injury may result in due to the
malfunction of the air bag sys-
tem.
2GHA2125B
1GHA2126/1GHA2127
(Continued)
• Never allow front passenger to
put their hands, feet or face on or
close to the instrument panel. In
the event of air bag deployment,
such a mispositioned occupant
would be likely to suffer severe
injury or death.
• Never allow children, pregnant
women or frail persons to sit in
the front passenger seat. Do not
put child restraint system on the
front passenger's seat either.
They may be seriously injured by
the air bag inflation when air bag
deploys.
• Do not put objects or stickers on
the instrument panel. Do not
apply any accessory to the front
windshield. Do not install after-
market mirrors or accessories on
the factory-installed rearview mir-
ror. Any of these could interfere
with the deployment of the air bag
or could hit your body at high
speed and cause severe bodily
injury and even death.
365
Knowing your vehicle
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
It is designed to help protect the heads of
the front seat occupants and the rear out-
board seat occupants in certain side
impact collisions.
• The curtain air bag deployment occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected
by the impact.
• The side air bags (side and curtain air
bags) are not designed to deploy dur-
ing collisions from the front or rear of
the vehicle or in most rollover situa-
tions.
• The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and impact.The
curtain air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
WARNING
• In order for side air bags (side
and curtain air bags) to provide
best protection, both front seat
occupants and both outboard
rear occupants should sit in an
upright position with the seat
belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system. Make sure to put
the child restraint system as far
away from the door side as possi-
ble, and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side air
bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
2GHA2125
2GHA2125A
Knowing your vehicle
663
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision?
(Inflation and non-inflation conditions
of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expected
to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact acci-
dents, as well as low speed impacts. In
other words, just because your vehicle is
damaged and even if it is totally unus-
able, don’t be surprised that the air bags
did not inflate.
Air bag collision sensors
➀
SRS control module
➁
Front impact sensor
➂
Side impact sensor
OGH026025/OGH026023/OGH026024/1GHA2128
➀
➁
➂
367
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag inflation condition
Front air bag
Front air bags (driver’s and front passen-
ger’s air bags) are designed to inflate
when the impact is delivered to front col-
lision sensors depending on the intensity,
speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air bag
or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of front
bumper, body or B pillar where
side collision sensors are
installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing aftermarket bumper
guards or replacing a bumper
with non-genuine parts may
adversely affect your vehicles
collision and air bag deployment
performance.
1GHA2271
369
Knowing your vehicle
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, the air
bags do not provide proper protection.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collision, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment does not provide occupant
protection.
However, side or curtain air bags may
inflate depending on the intensity, vehi-
cle speed and angles of impact.
• In a slant or angled collision, the force
of impact may direct the occupants in a
direction between the front and side air
bags, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
1GHA2273 AIR19A 1GHA2270
Knowing your vehicle
703
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly altered by such “under-ride” col-
lisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-
dents because air bag deployment
would not provide proper protection to
the occupants.
However, side air bags may inflate
when the vehicle is rolled over by a
side impact collision, if the vehicle is
equipped with side air bags and cur-
tain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not ade-
quately delivered to the sensors.
1GHA2274L AIR21 1GHA2275
371
Knowing your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bag only operates when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
positions.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side air bag or curtain
air bag) in order to help protect the
occupants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate by the severity of a collision and
its direction. These two factors deter-
mine whether the sensors send out an
electronic deployment/inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the densi-
ty and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision.However, factors are not limit-
ed to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will sim-
ply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of the
extremely short time in which a collision
occurs and the need to get the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures.This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe collision
and is thus a necessary part of air bag
design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which normally can
include facial abrasions, bruises and
broken bones, and sometimes more
serious injuries because that inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steer-
ing wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
Knowing your vehicle
723
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest to both the safety belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. We strongly urge
you to open your doors and/or win-
dows as soon as possible after impact
in order to reduce discomfort and pre-
vent prolonged exposure to the
smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with the cold water
immediately and consult the doctor if the
symptom persists.
WARNING - Seated
positioning
• Driver should sit as far back (at
least 10 inches (250 mm) away
from the steering wheel air bag as
possible to reduce the risk of
injury or death in a collision. The
front passenger should always
move their seat as far back as
possible and sit back in their
seat.
• In the event of a collision the air
bags inflate instantly. Passengers
may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries which normally include
facial or bodily abrasions, injuries
by the broken glasses or burns by
the explosives.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in steering wheel
and/or instrument panel and/or in
both sides of the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are very
hot. To prevent injury, do not touch
the air bag storage areas internal
components immediately after an
air bag has inflated.
373
Knowing your vehicle
Installing a child restraint on a
front passenger’s seat is forbid-
den.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraint in the front passenger’s
seat either.If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the improperly positioned or
improperly restrained child.
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light in
your instrument panel is to alert you of a
potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the indicator light should blink or illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds, then
go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after the engine
starts.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
ADAIRBAG
AIR
BAG
WARNING
• Never put child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it
would cause serious or fatal
injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats in which side
air bags are equipped, be sure to
put the child restraint system as
far away from the door side as
possible, and securely lock the
child restraint system in position.
Inflation of side or curtain air bag
could cause serious injury or
death due to the expansion
impact.
Knowing your vehicle
743
Air bag (Supplemental Restraint
System) service
Your Supplemental Restraint System is
virtually maintenance-free. There are no
parts which you can service.
You must have the system serviced
under the following circumstances:
• If an air bag ever inflates, the air bag
must be replaced.Do not try to remove
or discard the air bag by yourself.This
must be done by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• If the air bag warning indicator light
alerts you to a problem, have the air
bag system checked as soon as possi-
ble. Otherwise, your air bag system
may be ineffective.
When repairing or scrapping the
vehicles
• Repairing steering wheel, instrument
panel, center console or roofs, or
installing car audio around center con-
sole or painting front metal sheet could
disable the air bag system. Have them
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
• When leaving the vehicle at an author-
ized Kia dealer, inform the facility that
the vehicle is equipped with an air bag
system, and leave the owner’s manual
in the vehicle.
• Since the air bag system contains
explosive chemical substances, con-
tact an authorized Kia dealer when
scrapping the vehicle.
WARNING - No mainte-
nance or repair
• Do not modify your steering
wheel, seat or any other part of
the Supplemental Restraint
System. Modification could make
the system inoperable.
• Do not work on the system’s com-
ponents or wiring. This could
cause the air bags to inflate inad-
vertently, possibly seriously injur-
ing someone.Working on the sys-
tem could also disable the sys-
tem so that the air bags would not
deploy in a collision.
• Any work on the SRS system,
such as removing, installing,
repairing, or any work on the
steering wheel must be per-
formed by a qualified Kia techni-
cian. Improper handling of the air
bag system may result in serious
personal injury or death.
CAUTION - No modifica-
tion
Do not modify any part of the air
bag system. Modification could
make the air bag system ineffective
or could cause unnecessary
deployment.
375
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels which are required by the U.S.National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) are attached to alert
driver and passengers of potential risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings focus on the risk to children, Kia also wants you to be aware of the risks which adults are
exposed to.Those have been described in previous pages.
OGH027026N-2/5GHN2206/OGH36602N/1GHA2131
➀
➂
➁
(if equipped)
Knowing your vehicle
763
Outside the vehicle
• To open the trunk, insert the key into
the lock (
➀
) and turn it clockwise (
➁
).
If the trunk is opened with the key while
all the doors are locked, trunk will be
locked if closed.
• To open the trunk, pull up (
➃
) the trunk
lid by pressing the button (
➂
) of the
trunk handle when the trunk is
unlocked. Trunk can be opened by
pressing the button (
➂
) of the handle
and pulling up the lid while any door is
unlocked.
• To close the trunk, use both hands to
push the trunk lid down. Check to see
if the trunk is completely shut. If all the
doors are locked then the trunk will be
locked too.
• If the trunk lid control button in the
glove box is in the ON position
(depressed), the trunk can be opened
with a transmitter.
• If the trunk is opened with the transmit-
ter while all the doors are locked, the
trunk will be locked when closed.
• Trunk cannot be opened with the sub
key.
TRUNK
OGH026007
PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehi-
cle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
CAUTION
Do not try to open the trunk with the
sub key. It may damage the key set.
377
Knowing your vehicle
Trunk room lamp
Trunk room lamp turns on when the trunk
is opened. It remains on until the trunk is
securely closed.
Inside the vehicle
To open the trunk from inside the vehicle,
make sure the trunk lid control button in
the glove box is ON, then pull the trunk
lid release switch (
➀
) on the driver’s door
panel.
If the trunk lid control button in the glove
box is OFF, the trunk can only be opened
with the vehicle master key.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the trunk lid open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle causing
serious injury or death to vehicle
occupants. Open trunk lids can
also dangerously obscure rear view
vision.
If you must drive with the trunk lid
open, keep the air vents open so
that additional outside air comes
into the vehicle.
1GHA2018
CAUTION
Make sure to close the trunk
securely. If it remains open while
the engine is not running, it may
cause battery discharge because
the trunk room lamp remains on.
1GHA2019
Knowing your vehicle
783
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an emer-
gency trunk release cable located inside
the trunk. The lever glows in the dark
when the trunk lid is closed. If someone
is inadvertently locked in the trunk, mov-
ing the handle in the direction of the
arrow will release the trunk latch mecha-
nism and open the trunk.
OGH026009
WARNING
No one should be allowed to occu-
py the trunk of the vehicle at any
time. If the trunk is partially or total-
ly latched and the person is unable
to get out, severe injury or death
could occur due to lack of ventila-
tion, exhaust fumes and rapid heat
build-up, or because of exposure to
cold weather conditions. The trunk
is also a highly dangerous location
in the event of a crash because it is
not a protected occupant space but
merely a part of the vehicle’s crush
zone.
WARNING
• If a person is locked in the trunk,
they can pull the emergency
release to open the trunk lid.
• We recommend that cars be kept
locked and keys be kept out of
the reach of children, and that
parents teach their children about
the dangers of playing in trunks.
379
Knowing your vehicle
Trunk lock system
The trunk lid control button located in the
vehicle glove box is used to prevent
unauthorized access to the trunk.
Trunk locking
To activate the trunk lock system so that
the trunk can only be opened with the
master key, perform the following:
1. Open the glove box.
2. Set the trunk lid control button to OFF
position (not depressed).
3. Close the glove box and lock the glove
box with the master key.
When leaving the key with a parking lot
attendant or valet, perform steps 1 to 3
above and leave the sub key with the
attendent. Sub key can start the engine
and operate door locks only.
Lock release
To release the trunk lock feature, open
the glove box with the master key and set
the trunk lid control button to ON position
(depressed). In this position the trunk will
open with the trunk lid release switch or
transmitter. The trunk can never be
opened with the sub key.
1GHA2004
Knowing your vehicle
803
Opening the hood:
1. Pull the release lever on the lower left
side of the instrument panel to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, slightly
raise the hood, pull (
➁
) the secondary
latch (
➀
) inside of the hood center and
lift the hood.
3. Raise the hood. It will raise completely
by itself after it has been raised about
halfway.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-
lowing:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place. Make
sure the hood is properly locked before
driving.
HOOD
1GHA2023
OGH026011
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, make
sure that all engine parts and
tools have been removed from
the engine area and that no one’s
hands are near the hood opening.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
381
Knowing your vehicle
1. Stop the engine.
2.To open the fuel filler lid, push the
release button located on the driver’s
lower door.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.
4.To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank
cap counter-clockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
6.To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”.This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
7. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-
ly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
1GHA2021
OCM052015
WARNING
To avoid injury from sharp objects,
wear protective gloves when open-
ing the fuel filler door manually.
WARNING - Refueling
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can
cause serious injuries. Always
remove the fuel cap carefully and
slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if
you hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
Knowing your vehicle
823
WARNING
Automotive fuels are flammable/
explosive materials. When refuel-
ing, please note the following
guidelines carefully. Failure to fol-
low these guidelines may result in
severe personal injury, severe
burns or death by fire or explosion.
• Before refueling always note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at
the gas station facility.
Note and follow all safety precau-
tions and warning posted at the
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle or
fuel filler cap, you should elimi-
nate potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touching
another metal part of the front of
the vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or
other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling.
Do not touch, rub or slide against
any item or fabric (polyester,
satin, nylon, etc.) capable of pro-
ducing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can ignite
fuel vapors resulting in explo-
sion. If you must re-enter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially dangerous
static electricity discharge by
touching a metal part of the vehi-
cle, away from the fuel filler neck,
nozzle or other gasoline source.
•
When using a portable fuel con-
tainer be sure to place the contain-
er on the ground prior to refueling.
Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the fill-
ing is complete. Use only portable
fuel containers designed to carry
and store gasoline.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use cellular phones
around a gas station or while
refueling any vehicle. Electric
current and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. If you must use
your cellular phone use it in a
place away from the gas station.
• When refueling always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Always insure that
the engine is OFF before and dur-
ing refueling. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
fuel filler cap and door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
(Continued)
383
Knowing your vehicle
When fuel filler lid does not open
with the release button
1. Open the trunk.
2. Pull the emergency hook for fuel filler
lid inside the trunk.
OGH026010
(Continued)
• Do not light any fire around a gas
station. DO NOT use matches or a
lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or
leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle
while at a gas station especially
during refueling. Automotive fuel
is highly flammable and can,
when ignited, result in explosion
by flames.
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station or
contact the police and local fire
department. Follow any safety
instructions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel with gasoline
(unleaded fuel) only for the gaso-
line engine vehicles.
• Check to make sure the fuel filler
cap is securely closed after refu-
eling.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
Kia cap or the equivalent speci-
fied for your vehicle. An incorrect
fuel filler cap can result in a seri-
ous malfunction of the fuel sys-
tem or emission control system.
Correct replacement caps are
available at authorized Kia deal-
ers.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• A loose fuel filler cap may cause
the “Check Engine” (Malfunction
Indicator) light in the instrument
panel to illuminate unnecessarily.
• If the fuel filler lid will not open in
cold weather because the area
around it is frozen, push or lightly
tap the lid.
Knowing your vehicle
843
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors.To
adjust the position of either mirror, move
the lever (
➀
) to R or L to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point (▲) on the
mirror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the lever into neu-
tral position to prevent inadvertent
adjustment.
MIRRORS
2GHA2205
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch is
depressed. Do not depress the
switch longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hands.
Doing so may damage the parts.
➀
WARNING
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
385
Knowing your vehicle
Automatic mirror adjustment in
reverse maneuvers (if equipped)
When the transaxle gear is shifted into
reverse (R), the outside rearview mir-
ror(s) will automatically be turned down-
ward about 5 degrees to improve driver
visibility. It will stay in that position until
the transaxle shift lever is shifted out of
reverse (R).
L : Both the left and right outside
rearview mirrors will be turned
downward about 5 degrees.
R : Only the right outside rearview
mirror will be turned downward
about 5 degrees.
Center : Automatic mirror adjustment
function is disabled, no mirror
will be turned downward.
The outside rearview mirror(s) will return
to its previous position automatically if
outside rearview mirror selection switch
is changed to another position, or
transaxle shift lever is shifted out of
reverse (R).
(Examples)
If the shift lever is shifted into reverse (R)
when the outside rearview mirror selec-
tion switch is in L, both the right and left
outside rearview mirrors will automatical-
ly be turned down 5 degrees
If the outside rearview mirror selection
switch is set to R while shift lever is in
reverse (R), the left outside rearview mir-
ror will return to its previous position.The
right outside rearview mirror will not
return to it’s previous position.
If the shift lever is shifted into any other
range OR the outside rearview mirror
selection switch is set to the center, the
right outside rearview mirror will auto-
matically return to its original position.
Folding the outside rearview
mirror
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of the mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
OGH026031N
Center
E1V2B03032
Knowing your vehicle
863
Outside rearview mirror heater
(if equipped)
The outside rearview mirror heater is
actuated in connection with the rear win-
dow defroster. To heat the outside
rearview mirror glass, push the button for
the rear window defroster.
The outside rearview mirror glass will be
heated for defrosting or defogging and
will give you improved rear vision in
inclement weather conditions. Push the
button again to turn the heater off. The
outside rearview mirror heater automati-
cally turns off after 20 minutes.
Day/night rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to the center
on the view through the rear window.
Make this adjustment before you start
driving.
Manual type
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
WARNING
Do not place objects in the rear seat
or cargo area which would interfere
with your vision out the rear win-
dow.
2GHA2203
Day
Night
Day/Night lever
387
Knowing your vehicle
Electric type (if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatical-
ly controls the glare from the headlights
of the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and through a
chemical reaction, automatically controls
the headlight glare from vehicles behind
you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into
reverse (R), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-
cle.
• Type A (if equipped)
Press the button (
➀
) to turn the automat-
ic- dimming function on, the mirror indi-
cator light will illuminate.
Press the button (
➀
) once again to turn
the automatic- dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• Type B (if equipped)
Press the “O” button to turn the automat-
ic- dimming function off. The mirror indi-
cator light will turn off.
Press the “I” button to turn the automatic-
dimming function on, the mirror indicator
light will illuminate.
✽✽
NOTICE
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
2GHA2204A
Sensor
➀
Indicator
2GHN3310
Knowing your vehicle
883
Map light
Front (if equipped)
The lights are turned ON or OFF by
pressing the corresponding switch.
Dome light (if equipped)
➀
OFF - The light stays off even when a
door is open.
➁ DOOR - The light turns on when a door
is opened or when a door is
unlocked by the transmitter (if
equipped). Interior light goes
out slowly after 30 seconds if
the door is closed. However if
the ignition switch is ON or all
vehicle doors are locked when
the door is closed, interior light
will turn off even within 30 sec-
onds.
➂
ON - The light turns on and stays on
even when the doors are all
closed.
Door courtesy lamp
The door courtesy lamp comes ON when
the door is opened to assist entering or
exiting the vehicle. It also serves as a
warning to passing vehicles that the
vehicle door is open.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
2GHA2060
OFF DOOR ON
E2BLA324
2GHB3004
389
Knowing your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• To avoid possible theft, do not leave
valuables in the storage compartment.
• Since stored items may move while
driving, be sure to position them in
the storage compartment so that they
do not make noise or cause a potential
safety hazard when the vehicle is mov-
ing.
• Always keep the storage compartment
covers closed while driving. Do not
attempt to place many items in the
storage compartment that the storage
compartment cover cannot close
securely.
Center console storage
To open either of the console storage
compartments, press button
➀
or
➁
.
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or front passenger.
Multi box
Rear (if equipped)
To open the storage compartment, pull
the armrest down and pull up on the lock-
ing tab (
➀
). It can be used for storing
small items.
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
WARNING
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
OGH039376N
1GHA2234A
➀
➁
Knowing your vehicle
903
Glove box
The glove box can be locked (
➀
) and
unlocked (
➁
) with a master key.
It cannot be locked/unlocked with the sub
key.
To open the glove box, make sure it is
unlocked, then pull the handle (
➂
) and
the glove box will automatically open
(
➃
). Close the glove box after use.
✽✽
NOTICE
Since key is not fully inserted into the
glove box key set, do not apply excessive
force. Doing so may damage the parts.
Sunglass holder
A sunglass storage compartment is pro-
vided on the overhead console. To open
the sunglass holder, press the cover and
the holder will slowly open. Place your
sunglasses in the compartment door with
the lenses facing out. Push to close.
✽✽
NOTICE
Make sure the sunglass holder is closed
while driving.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in case
of an accident or sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.
2GHA2060B
OGH026087
391
Knowing your vehicle
Cigarette lighter
Front
To use the cigarette lighter, press the
front face then release it to allow the cig-
arette lighter and ashtray to slowly
extend from the center panel.
To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in
and release it.When it is heated, it auto-
matically pops out ready for use.
If the engine is not running, the ignition
switch must be in the ACC position for
the lighter to operate.
Ashtrays
Front
To use the ashtray, press the front face
and release it to allow the cigarette
lighter and ashtray to slowly extend from
the center panel.
To remove the ashtray, grasp the ashtray
bucket (
➀) and carefully pull it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
OGH026079N
OGH026081N
CAUTION
• Do not hold the lighter in after it is
already heated because it will
overheat.
• Only a genuine Kia lighter should
be used in the cigarette lighter
socket. The use of plug-in acces-
sories (shavers, hand-held vacu-
ums, and coffee pots, for exam-
ple) may damage the socket or
cause electrical failure.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
Knowing your vehicle
923
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Front
To open the cup holder cover, press the
cover and it will automatically open.Push
the cover to close after use.
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you could be burned.
Such a burn to the driver could
cause a loss of control of the
vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or insecure bottles, glasses,
cans, etc., in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion.
OGH026083
393
Knowing your vehicle
Rear
To use cup holders in rear seat, pull
down the rear seat armrest.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket
(
➀
) and swing it to the side.
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and pull up the mirror cover (
➁
).
Pull the extension panel (
➂
) of the sunvi-
sor to lengthen the sunvisor.
OGH026090
2GHN482
CAUTION
Do not place heavy cups or cans in
cup holders. Cup holders could be
damaged.
CAUTION
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor to
its original position after use. If the
vanity mirror is not closed securely,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and pos-
sible sunvisor damage.
Knowing your vehicle
943
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlets are designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate with
vehicle electrical systems. The devices
should draw less than 10 amps with the
engine running.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Use when the engine is running and
remove a plug from the power outlet
after using the electric appliance.
Using when the engine stops or
remaining the electric appliance
plugged in for many hours may cause
the battery to discharge.
• Only use the electric appliances which
are less than 12V and 10A in electric
capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner orheater to
the lowest operation level when you
have to use the power outlet while
using the air-conditioner or heater.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference and when
plugged into a vehicle's power outlet.
These devices may cause excessive
audio static and malfunctions in other
electronic systems or devices used in
your vehicle.
Aux, USB and iPod port
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod
port, you can use an aux port to connect
audio devices and an USB port to plug in
an USB and also an iPod port to plug in
an iPod.
✽✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
1GHA2234
2GHN3350
Center rear (if equipped)
OGH029400
Rear
395
Knowing your vehicle
Clock
Analog (if equipped)
Whenever the battery terminals, A/V
CLOCK fuse, or Power Connect are dis-
connected, you must reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
➀
: time increases one minute each time
the button is pressed. It increases
continuously if pressed longer than 3
seconds.
Digital (if equipped)
Whenever the battery terminals, A/V
CLOCK fuse, or Power Connect are dis-
connected, you must reset the time.
For details, see end of chapter 3.
OGH026077N
➀
OGH029078
Knowing your vehicle
963
If your vehicle is equipped with this fea-
ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroof
with the sunroof control buttons located
on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
Sliding the sunroof
Autoslide open
To use the autoslide feature, momentar-
ily (more than 0.5 second) press the
SLIDE OPEN button on the overhead
console.The sunroof will slide all the way
open. To stop the sunroof sliding at any
point, press any sunroof control button.
Manual slide open
Press the SLIDE OPEN button on the
overhead console for less than 0.5 sec-
ond.
Close
To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE
button on the overhead console and hold
it until the sunroof is closed.
Tilting the sunroof
Autotilt open
To use the autotilt feature, momentarily
(more than 0.5 second) press the TILT
UP button on the overhead console.The
sunroof will tilt all the way open. To stop
the sunroof tilting at any point, press any
sunroof control button.
Manual tilt open
Press the TILT UP button on the over-
head console for less than 0.5 second.
Close
To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE
button on the overhead console and hold
it until the sunroof is closed.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
SLIDE
SLIDE
OPEN
OPEN
TILT
TILT
UP
UP
CLOSE
CLOSE
SLIDE
SLIDE
OPEN
OPEN
TILT
TILT
UP
UP
CLOSE
CLOSE
2GHA2060A
CAUTION
• Do not continue to press the sun-
roof control button(s) after the
sunroof is fully opened, closed, or
tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
• The sunroof cannot slide when it
is in the tilt position nor can it be
tilted while in an open or slide
position.
397
Knowing your vehicle
Sunshade
The sunshade will be opened with the
glass panel automatically when the glass
panel is slid.After closing the glass panel
the sunshade will only close manually.
In case of an emergency
If the sunroof does not open electrically:
1. Remove the lens.
2. Open the sunglass holder.
3. Remove the four (4) screws, and then
remove the overhead console.
4. Insert the emergency handle (provided
with the vehicle) and turn the handle
clockwise to open or counterclockwise
to close.
OGH036902N
WARNING
• Do not extend face or arms out-
side through the sunroof opening
while driving.
• Make sure hand and face are
safely out of the way before clos-
ing a sunroof.
CAUTION
• Do not press any sunroof control
button longer than necessary.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be dam-
aged.
• The sunroof is made to slide
together with sunshade. Do not
leave the sunshade closed while
the sunroof is open.
OGH026020
OGH026021A
Knowing your vehicle
983
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, or you use the
emergency handle to operate the sun-
roof, you have to reset your sunroof sys-
tem as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-
tion.
2. According to the position of the sun-
roof, do as follows.
1) in case that the sunroof has closed
completely or been tilted
: Press the TILT UP button for 1
second.
2) in case that the sunroof has slide-
opened
: Press and hold the CLOSE button
for more than 5 seconds until the
sunroof has closed completely.
And then press the TILT UP but-
ton for 1 second
3. Then, release it.
4. Press and hold the TILT UP button
once again until the sunroof has
returned to the original position of
TILT UP after it is raised a little higher
than the maximum TILT UP position.
When this is complete, the sunroof sys-
tem is reset.
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is turned on
while the ignition key is in either the “ON”
or “ACC” position, your car will receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals
through the antenna in the rear window
glass.
ANTENNA
OGH036399N
CAUTION
• Do not clean the inside of the rear
window glass with a cleaner or
scraper to remove the foreign
deposits as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coating
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and FM
broadcast signals.
399
Knowing your vehicle
The steering wheel audio remote control
button is installed to promote safe driv-
ing.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not operate audio remote control
buttons simultaneously.
MODE
Press the MODE button to select Radio,
CD (Compact Disc) or CDC* (Compact
Disc Changer).*
Each press of the button changes the
display as follows:
VOLUME (▲
/
▼)
• Press the VOLUME (▲) button to
increase volume.
• Press the VOLUME (▼) button to
decease volume.
PRESET
If the PRESET button is pressed for
0.8 second or more, it will work as fol-
lows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the SEEK UP select
button.
CD mode
It will function as the FF button.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP button.
If the PRESET button is pressed for
less than 0.8 second, it will work as
follows in each mode. (if equipped)
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET UP select
button.
CD mode
It will function as the TRACK UP button.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
OGH036400
RADIO (FM1 ➝ FM2 ➝ AM) ➝ CD ➝ CDC*
* : if equipped
Knowing your vehicle
1003
How car audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your car. This signal is
then received by the radio and sent to
your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear.This
can be due to factors such as the dis-
tance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the pres-
ence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by build-
ings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening con-
ditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The fol-
lowing conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
AUDIO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
¢¢¢
JBM001
¢¢¢
¢¢¢
JBM002 JBM003
FM reception AM reception FM radio station
3101
Knowing your vehicle
• Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade.When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-
er station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-
lar phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
¢¢¢
JBM004 JBM005
CAUTION
When using a communication sys-
tem such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adverse-
ly affect safe operation of the vehi-
cle.
WARNING
Don’t use a cellular phone when
you are driving. The driver should
stop at a safe place to use a cellular
phone.
Knowing your vehicle
1023
Care of disc (if equipped)
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows for ventilation
before using your car audio.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of soft
cloth before playback (wipe it from the
center to the outside edge.)
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure on undesirable matter other
than CDs are inserted into the CD
player (Do not insert more than one
CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods.In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your car
audio system.
✽✽
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy-Protected
Audio CD
Some copy-protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that if you
try to play copy protected CDs and the
CD player of your car audio is not per-
forming to your expectation, this may be
caused by those CDs and not a defect in
the device itself. Please replace those
CDs.
3103
Knowing your vehicle
A-200GHU
1. FM/AM Selection Button
2. Automatic Channel Selection Button
3. SCAN Button
4. MUTE Button
5. Pre-set Button
6. SET UP Button
7.TUNE/ENTER Button
8. Power ON/OFF/Volume Control Button
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL(CDP MODEL)
Knowing your vehicle
1043
A-300GHU
1. FM/AM Selection Button
2. Automatic Channel Selection Button
3. SCAN Button
4. MUTE Button
5. Pre-set Button
6. SET UP Button
7.TUNE/ENTER Button
8. Power ON/OFF/Volume Control Button
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL(6CDC MODEL)
MONITOR
3105
Knowing your vehicle
1. FM/AM Selection Button
Turns to FM or AM mode and toggles
FM1
➟FM2➟AM➟...➟FM1➟... when the
button is pressed each time.
2. Automatic Channel Selection
Button
• When the [TRACK ] is pressed, it
will automatically tune to the previous
lower station.
• When the [SEEK ] is pressed, it will
automatically tune to the next higher
station.
3. SCAN Selection Button
When the button is pressed, it automati-
cally only [SCAN] up.The sound hearing
for 5 seconds per all searched station
preset.
4. MUTE Selection Button
Push button to stop sound and [MUTE] is
displayed.
5. Pre-set Selection Button
• Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-
onds to play the channel saved in each
button.
• Push pre-set button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to save current channel to the
respective button with a beep.
6. SET UP Button
• The SET UP Mode is displayed if the
[SET UP] Button is pressed. While in
SET UP Mode, use the [TUNE/ENTER]
Button to set the SOUND(BASS, MID-
DLE, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE),
SAT(CHANNEL/TITLE, CATEGORY/
CHANNEL), CLOCK(12, 24), TEMP
(°C, °F) and SCROLL(ON, OFF).
• To exit from SET UP Mode, press
"RETURN" or wait 10 seconds.
• Method of adjusting the SET UP is the
same for CDP, AUX, USB, and iPod
Mode.
■ Setting the SET UP Mode
Press the [TUNE/ENTER] Button to
select and make adjustments to the
desired mode within SET UP Mode.
• While in SOUND Mode, press the
[TUNE/ENTER] Button to change in
the order of BASS
➟MIDDLE➟TREBLE
➟FADER➟BALANCE➟SET UP Mode.
Turn the [TUNE/ENTER] Button in
clockwise or counterclockwise direc-
tion to make adjustments for each SUB
Mode.
• While in SAT Mode, press the [TUNE/
ENTER] Button to display the "CHAN-
NEL/TITLE, CATEGORY/CHANNEL".
Rotate the [TUNE/ENTER] Button to
select the SUB Mode and press the
[TUNE/ENTER] Button to set.
• While in CLOCK Mode, press the
[TUNE/ENTER] Button to display the
"ON, OFF".
Rotate the [TUNE/ENTER] Button to
select the SUB Mode and press the
[TUNE/ENTER] Button to set.
(CLOCK Mode CDC Only)
Knowing your vehicle
1063
• While in TEMP Mode, press the [TUNE
/ENTER] Button to display the "°C, °F".
Rotate the [TUNE/ENTER] Button to
select the SUB Mode and press the
[TUNE/ENTER] Button to set.
(TEMP Mode CDC Only)
• While in SCROLL Mode, press the
[TUNE/ENTER] Button to display the
"ON, OFF".
Rotate the [TUNE/ENTER] Button to
select the SUB Mode and press the
[TUNE/ENTER] Button to set.
7.TUNE/ENTER Button
• Turn this button clockwise by one notch
to increase frequency by 200KHz(AM:
10KHz) from current frequency.
• Turn this button counterclockwise by
one notch to decrease frequency by
200KHz(AM:10KHz)from current fre-
quency.
• Press this button while holding SET
UP button to activate/inactivate the
item to select SET UP item using left
and right function of the Tune button.
8. Power ON/OFF & Volume
Control Button
Turns on/off the set when the IGNITION
SWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button
is turned to the right, it increases the vol-
ume and left, decreases the volume.
channel is found.
3107
Knowing your vehicle
A-200GHU
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Indicator
3. Automatic Track Selection Button
4. SCAN Play Button
5. MUTE Button
6. RANDOM Play Button
7. REPEAT Play Button
8. INFO Selection Button
9. FOLDER Search Button
10. CD Selection Button
11. File(Track) Search/ENTER Button
12. CD Eject Button
CDP(CDP MODEL)
Knowing your vehicle
1083
A-300GHU
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Indicator
3. Automatic Track Selection Button
4. SCAN Play Button
5. MUTE Button
6. RANDOM Play Button
7. REPEAT Play Button
8. INFO Selection Button
9. Folder Search Button
10. CD Selection Button
11. File(Track) Search/ENTER Button
12. CD Eject Button
13. CD LOAD Button
14. DISC UP/DOWN Button
CD(6CDC MODEL)
MONITOR
3109
Knowing your vehicle
1. CD Loading Slot
Please face printed side upward and gen-
tly push in.When the ignition switch is on
ACC or ON and power is off, power is
automatically turned on if the CD is
loaded. This CDP supports only 12cm
CD.If VCD, Data CD are loaded, Reading
"Error message" will appear and CD will
be ejected.
2. CD Indicator
• When car ignition switch is ACC or ON
and if the CD is loaded, this indicator is
lighted. If the CD is ejected the light is
turned off(CDP Only).
• If the LOAD button is pressed, this indi-
cator will begin to blink(CDC Only).
3. Automatic Track Selection
Button
• Push [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 seconds to play from the beginning
of current song.
• Push [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 seconds and press again within 1
seconds to play the previous song.
• Push [TRACK ] button for 0.8 or
longer to initiate reverse direction high
speed sound search of current song.
• Push [SEEK ] button for less than
0.8 seconds to play the next song.
• Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or
longer to initiate high speed sound
search of current song.
4. SCAN Play Button
Plays first 10 seconds of each song in
the CD. To cancel the mode, press the
key once again.
5. MUTE Button
Press this button to temporarily cut off
the Sound. "Mute" is displayed on the
LCD.Press the button once again to can-
cel MUTE mode.
6. RANDOM Play Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to activate 'RDM' mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate 'ALL RDM'
mode.
• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc
are played back in a random
sequence.
• ALL RDM(MP3/WMA Only) : All files in
a disc are played back in the random
sequence.
7. REPEAT Play Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to activate 'RPT' mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate 'FLD RPT'
mode.
• RPT : Only a track(file) is repeatedly
played back.
• FLD RPT(MP3/WMA Only) : Only files
in a folder are repeatedly played back.
8. INFORMATION Selection
Button
Displays the information of the current
CD TRACK(FILE) as below when the
button is pressed each time.
• CDDA : DISC TITLE
➟DISC ARTIST➟
TRACK TITLE➟TRACK ARTIST➟
TOTAL TRACK➟...
• MP3/WMA : FILE NAME
➟TITLE➟
ARTIST➟ALBUM➟FOLDER NAME➟
TOTAL FILE➟...
9. Folder Search Button
• Folder name/File name(the first song
in the folder) is moved up or down from
currently playing folder.
• To select to the displayed folder, press
ENTER(NO.11) button.
Knowing your vehicle
1103
10. CD Selection Button
• If there is a cd in the CDP DECK it
turns to CD mode when the button is
pressed each time.
• If no Disc, it displays "NO DISC" and
returns to th previous mode.
11. File(Track) Search/ENTER
Button
• Turn this button clockwise to display
Track NO(File name) after current
song.
• Turn this button counterclockwise to
display Track NO(File Name) before
current song.
• To select to the displayed song, press
the button.
12. CD Eject Button
• Press this button to eject the CD during
CD playback.
• If no CD is in the deck, "NO DISC" will
be displayed and returns to the previ-
ous mode.
❈ ALL EJECT(CDC ONLY)
Press this button for more than 0.8 sec-
onds to eject all discs inside the decks in
respective order.
13. CD LOAD Button(CDC Only)
• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to load CD into deck.
• Press this button for more than 0.8
seconds to load CDs into all available
deck(from 1~6).
• The last CD will play. 10 seconds idle
status will disable loading process.
14. DISC UP/DOWN Button(CDC
Only)
Disc is moved up or down from currently
playing disc.
3111
Knowing your vehicle
CAUTION -
Using USB
device
• To use the external USB device,
make sure the device is not
mounted when starting up the
vehicle and mount the device
after starting up.
• If you start the vehicle when the
USB device is mounted, it may
damage the USB device. (USB is
not ESA)
• If the vehicle is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take cautions for static electricity
when mounting or dismounting
the external USB device.
• Encoded MP3 PLAYER is not rec-
ognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the con-
nected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB devices is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recog-
nized.
• Only the USB device formatted to
FAT 12/16/32.
• USB device without USB IF authen-
tication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact
with human body or any object.
• If you repeat mounting or dis-
mounting USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
• You might hear strange noise
when mounting or dismounting a
USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you dismount the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode,the external USB device can
be damaged or malfunction.
Therefore,mount the external USB
device when the engine is turned
off or in another mode.
• Depending on the type and capac-
ity of the external USB device or
the type of the files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time taken for recognition of the
device, but this is not a trouble
Please wait for a moment.
• Do not use the USB device for other
purposes than playing music files.
• Use of USB accessories such as
the recharger or heater using USB
I/F may lower the performance or
cause trouble.
• If you use devices such as the
USB hub you purchased separate-
ly, the vehicle’s audio system may
not recognize the USB device.
Connect the USB device directly
to the multimedia terminal of the
vehicle.
Knowing your vehicle
1123
A-200GHU
1. AUX(USB) Selection Button
2. Automatic Track Selection Button
3. SCAN Play Button
4. RANDOM Play Button
5. REPEAT Play Button
6. INFO Selection Button
7. Folder Search Button
8. File Search/ENTER Button
USING USB(CDP MODEL)
3113
Knowing your vehicle
A-300GHU
1. AUX(USB) Selection Button
2. Automatic Track Selection Button
3. SCAN Play Button
4. RANDOM Play Button
5. REPEAT Play Button
6. INFO Selection Button
7. Folder Search Button
8. File Search/ENTER Button
USING USB(CDC MODEL)
MONITOR
Knowing your vehicle
1143
1. AUX/USB Selection Button
• If auxiliary device/USB/ is connected, it
turns to AUX/USB mode and toggles
as below when the button is pressed
each time.
• If no auxiliary device and USB is con-
nected, it displays "No Media" and
returns to the previous mode.
2. Automatic Track Selection
Button
• Press [TRACK ] to return to the
beginning of current file and Press
again within 1 seconds to return the
previous track file.
• Press and hold [TRACK ] to initiate
fast backward search.
• Press [SEEK ] for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to advance the next file.
• Press and hold [SEEK ] to initiate
fast forward search.
3. SCAN Play Button
Plays 10 seconds of each song in the
USB device.Press the button once again
to cancel scanning.
4. RANDOM Play Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to activate 'RDM' mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate 'ALL RDM'
mode.
• RDM : Only files in a folder are played
back in a random sequence.
• ALL RDM :All files in a USB memory are
played back in the random sequence.
5. REPEAT Play Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to activate 'RPT' mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate 'FLD RPT'
mode.
• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played
back.
• FLD RPT : Only files in a folder are
repeatedly played back.
6. INFORMATION Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of FILE NAME
➟TITLE➟ARTIST➟ALBUM➟FOLDER➟
TOTAL FILE➟NORMAL DISPLAY➟FILE
NAME
➟... (Displays no information if the
file has no song information.)
Press the button again to cancel the mode.
7. Folder Search Button
• Folder name/File name(the first song
in the folder) is moved up or down from
currently playing folder.
• To select to the displayed folder, press
ENTER(NO.8) button.
8. File Search/ENTER Button
• Turn this button clockwise to display
File name after current song.
• Turn this button counterclockwise to
display File Name before current song.
• To select to the displayed song, press
the button.
3115
Knowing your vehicle
1. iPod Selection Button
2. Automatic Track Selection Button
3. RANDOM Play Button
4. REPEAT Play Button
5. INFO Selection Button
6. Category Search Button
7. File Search/ENTER Button
A-200GHU
RUNNING
iPod
®
(CDP MODEL)
iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Knowing your vehicle
1163
1. iPod Selection Button
2. Automatic Track Selection Button
3. RANDOM Play Button
4. REPEAT Play Button
5. INFO Selection Button
6. Category Search Button
7. File Search/ENTER Button
RUNNING iPod
(CDP MODEL)
A-300GHU
MONITOR
3117
Knowing your vehicle
1. iPod Selection Button
If iPod is connected, it turns to iPod mode.
2. Automatic Track Selection Button
• Press the [TRACK ] button for less
than 0.8 seconds to play from the
beginning of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds and press it again within 1 sec-
onds to move and play the previous
track. Press the button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the [SEEK ] button for less
than 0.8 seconds to move to the next
track. Press the button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to play the song in forward
direction in fast speed.
3. RANDOM Play Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to activate 'RDM ' mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate 'ALBUM
RDM 'mode.
• RDM : All songs in the current catego-
ry are played back at random.
• ALBUM RDM: An album in the iPod is
selected at random and is played back
in the album song order.
4. REPEAT Play Button
A single song is repeatedly played back.
5. INFORMATION Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played back as below when the
button is pressed each time.
TITLE
➟ARTIST➟ALBUM➟...
6. Category Search Button
Moves to the upper category from current-
ly played category of the iPod.To move to
the category displayed, press [File Search
/ENTER] Button.You will be able to search
through the lower category of the selected
category. The order of iPod’s category is
PLAYLISTS, COMPOSERS, SONGS, AL-
BUMES, ARTISTS, GENRES.
7. File Search/ENTER Button
• When you turn the button clockwise, it
will display the songs(category) next to
the song currently played(category in
the same level). Also, when you turn
the button counterclockwise, it will dis-
play the songs(category) before the
song currently played(category in the
same level).
If you want to listen to the song dis-
played in the song category, press the
button, then it will skip to the selected
song and play.
• When you turn the button, it will display
the categorys next to the categorys
currently displayed. you can narrow
down your search as shown in the
table below.
1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP
Playlist Playlists Songs - -
Artist Artists Albums Songs -
Album Albums Songs - -
Song Songs - - -
Genre Genres Artists Albums Songs
Composer Composers Albums Songs -
Knowing your vehicle
1183
✽✽
NOTICE - Using iPod device
• Some iPod models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played. (iPod models
supported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,
5G)
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod crashes due to its own trou-
ble, reset iPod. (Reset: Refer to iPod
manual)
• iPod may not operate normally on low
battery.
(Continued)
• When the iPod cable is connected,
the system can be switched to the
AUX mode even without the iPod
device and can cause noise.
Disconnect iPod cable when you
are not using the iPod device.
CAUTION
- Using iPod
device
• You need the power cable exclu-
sive for iPod in order to operate
iPod with the buttons on the audio
system.The PC cable provided by
Apple may cause malfunction and
do not use it for vehicle use.
• When connecting the device with
iPod cable, push in the jack fully
not to interfere with communica-
tion.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of iPod and the audio system, the
sound effects of both devices will
overlap each and might cause
reduce or distort the quality of the
sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of iPod when adjusting
the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer
of iPod.
(Continued)
3119
Knowing your vehicle
1. SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button
2. Channel Selection Button
3. SCAN Selection Button
4. MUTE Selection Button
5. Preset Selection Button
6. INFO Selection Button
7. CAT/FOLDER Button
8.Tune Knob and Enter Button
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO(CDP MODEL)
A-200GHU
Knowing your vehicle
1203
1. SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button
2. Channel Selection Button
3. SCAN Selection Button
4. MUTE Selection Button
5. Preset Selection Button
6. INFO Selection Button
7. CAT/FOLDER Button
8.Tune Knob and Enter Button
SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO(6CDC MODEL)
A-300GHU
MONITOR
3121
Knowing your vehicle
How to Use SIRIUS Satellite
Radio
Your new Kia vehicle is equipped with 3
months complimentary period of SIRIUS
Satellite Radio so you have access to
over 130 channels of music, information
and entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your sub-
scription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you
will need to contact SIRIUS Customer
Care at 888-539-7474. Have your 12 digit
SID(Sirius Identification Number)/ESN
(Electronic Serial Number) ready. To
retrieve the SID/ESN, turn on the radio,
press the [SAT] button and tune to chan-
nel zero. please note that the vehicle will
need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky in
order for the radio to receive the activation
signal.
1. SATELLITE RADIO Selection
Button(SIRIUS Satellite Radio)
Press the [SAT] button to switch to SIR-
IUS Satellite Radio. It cycles through the
different bands as noted below.
SAT1
➟SAT2➟SAT3➟SAT1➟...
2. Channel Selection Button
• Press [TRACK ] or [SEEK ] but-
ton for less than 0.8 seconds to select
previous or next channel.
• Press [TRACK ] or [SEEK ] but-
ton for 0.8 or longer to continuously
move to previous or next channel.
• if "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at the
top of the screen, channel up/down is
done through the channels within cur-
rent category.
3. SCAN Selection Button
• When the button is pressed, it automat-
ically scans the radio stations upwards.
• The SCAN feature steps through each
channel, starting from the initial chan-
nel, for ten seconds. Press the [SCAN]
button again to stop the scan feature
and to listen to the currently selected
channel.
4. MUTE Selection Button
Press this button to temporarily cut off
the Sound. "MUTE" is displayed on the
LCD.Press the button once again to can-
cel MUTE mode.
5. Preset Selection Button
• Press [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8
seconds to play the Channel saved in
each button.
• Press [1]~[6] button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to save current Channel to the
respective button with a beep.
6. INFO Selection Button
Displays the information of the channel
currently played by in the order of CATE-
GORY NAME
➟ARTIST NAME➟COM-
POSER NAME
➟...(CH/TITLE Selection)
Displays the information of the channel
currently played in the order of SONG
TITLE
➟ARTIST NAME➟COMPOSER
NAME
➟... (CAT/CH Selection) (If there is
no information of COMPOSER NAME, it
returns to main display.)
Knowing your vehicle
1223
7. CAT/FOLDER Button
• Press [CAT ] or [FLDR ] button to
enter the Category list Mode, it dis-
plays cateogry items and highlights the
category that currently tuned channel
belongs to.
• On Category List Mode, press these
buttons to navigate category list.
• Press [ENTER] Button to select the
lowest channel in highlighted category.
• If channel is selected by selecting cat-
egory CATEGORY Icon is displayed at
the top of the screen.
8.Tune Knob and Enter Button
• Rotate clockwise to increase the chan-
nel number or to down the category in
the category list.
• Rotate counterclockwise to decrease
the channel number or to up the cate-
gory in the category list.
• Press this button to make selection of
channels or items.
❈❈
Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the antenna
or antenna cable is broken or unplugged.
Please consult with your Kia dealership.
2. Acquiring Signal
If this message is displayed, it means that
the antenna is covered and that the SIR-
IUS Satellite Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has
a clear view of the sky.
3123
Knowing your vehicle
1. DISPLAY ON/OFF
2. CLOCK Function
3.Time/Date Increase/Reduce Function
4. RESET Function
5. DATE Function
KEY BOARD
A-300GHU
Knowing your vehicle
1243
1. DISPLAY ON/OFF
• This is the display window ON/OFF
function.
• Each time the [DISP] button is pressed,
the display window will be turned
ON/OFF.
2. CLOCK Function
• This is the clock adjustment function.
• Each time [CLOCK] is pressed, the
second
➟minute will blink once every
0.5 seconds and switch modes.
• Pressing the [CLOCK] again while the
"minute" mode is blinking or waiting 10
seconds will turn off time adjustment
mode and save the set time.
• The clock can be set in 12 hour or 24
hour modes.The 12 hour system is the
default and can be changed to 24 hour
system within the SET-UP menu.
3.Time/Date Increase/Decrease
Function
• While in Time/Date mode, pressing the
[ ], [ ] buttons will increase/
decrease the time/date.
• This function will operate only after
pressing the time/date button and the
hour/minute/month/day is blinking.
4. RESET Function
• The RESET function can be used
when adjusting the time.
• If the [RESET] is pressed while adjust-
ing the "hour", the hour will display
"AM12" when using 12 hour clock
mode and "00" when using 24 hour
clock mode.
• If the RESET is pressed while adjust-
ing the "min", the minute display will be
changed to "00".
• The RESET function can be used
while adjusting the date.
• If the [RESET] is pressed while adjust-
ing the "month/day", the corresponding
display will be changed to "01month/
01day".
5. DATE Function
• This is used to adjust the date.
• Each time [DATE] is pressed, the mon-
th
➟day will blink once every 0.5 sec-
onds and switch modes.
• Pressing the [DATE] again while the
"day" is blinking or waiting 10 seconds
will turn off date adjustment mode and
save the set date.
❈ Slight differences with actual time may
occur. Please readjust the time upon
the occurrence of such differences.
4
Ignition switch / 4-2
Starting the engine / 4-4
Automatic transaxle / 4-5
Brake system / 4-10
Steering wheel / 4-17
Cruise control system / 4-19
Electronic stability control / 4-22
Instrument cluster / 4-25
Warnings and indicators / 4-31
Lighting / 4-38
Wipers and washers / 4-42
Defroster / 4-44
Hazard warning flasher / 4-45
Automatic climate control system / 4-46
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-56
Driving your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
24
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a door is opened, the ignition
switch will be illuminated for your con-
venience, provided the ignition switch is
not in the ON position.The light will go off
approximately 10 seconds after closing
the door or when the ignition switch is
turned on.
Ignition switch and anti-theft
steering column lock
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operative.
✽✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START posi-
tion to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
IGNITION SWITCH
1GHA3201 1GHA3201A
43
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, the shift lever must be in
the P (Park) position.
WARNING - Ignition switch
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving.This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
immediate accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the
driver’s seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in P
(Park), set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these pre-
cautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel while
the vehicle is in motion.The pres-
ence of your hand or arm in this
area could cause a loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not put any movable things
around the driver’s seat as they
can disturb your driving and may
cause accidents.
WARNING
When you intend to park or stop the
vehicle with the engine on, be care-
ful not to depress the accelerator
pedal for a long period of time. It
may overheat the engine or exhaust
system and cause fire.
Driving your vehicle
44
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4.In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depress-
ing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
STARTING THE ENGINE
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and acceler-
ator pedal.
45
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
OGH046045N
Depress the brake pedal when shifting.
The shift lever can be moved freely.
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Sports mode
Automatic mode
Driving your vehicle
64
Automatic transaxle operation
All normal forward driving is done with
the shift lever in the D (Drive) position.
To move the shift lever from the P (Park)
position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the lock release button
must be depressed.
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To avoid damage to your transaxle, do
not accelerate the engine in R
(Reverse) or any forward gear posi-
tion with the brakes on.
• When stopped on an upgrade, do not
hold the vehicle stationary with
engine power. Use the service brake
or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse)
when the engine is above idle speed.
Transaxle ranges
P (park)
This position locks the transaxle and pre-
vents the front wheels from rotating.
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into this position.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever is
in the P (PARK) position; then set
the parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur if
these precautions are not followed
in the order identified.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
so that it cannot be moved unless
the lock release button is pushed
in, AND set the parking brake
fully.
(Continued)
47
Driving your vehicle
R (reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you
may damage the transaxle if you shift
into R while the vehicle is in motion,
except as explained in “Rocking the
Vehicle”, in this manual.
N (neutral)
With the gearshift in the N position, the
wheels and transaxle are not locked.The
vehicle will roll freely even on the slight-
est incline unless the parking brake or
service brakes are applied.
D (drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion.The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 5-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
(Continued)
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (PARK) position. Set
the parking brake fully, shut the
engine off and take the key with
you. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur if
you do not follow these precau-
tions in the order specified.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Always apply the brake pedal when
you stop the vehicle on an inclined
road with the shift lever in the D
(Drive) position. Do NOT rely on the
engine and transaxle to prevent the
vehicle from rolling down the hill.
Before attempting to backup on an
inclined road, always apply the
brake pedal before moving the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position.
Driving your vehicle
84
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the “D” position
into the sports mode. To return to “D”
range operation, push the shift lever back
into the automatic mode.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
Snow mode
When driving on a slippery road, push
the shift lever forward into the +(up) posi-
tion. This causes the transaxle to shift
into the 2nd gear which is better for
smooth driving on a slippery road. Push
the shift lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Upshifts do not take place automati-
cally in sports mode. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the five forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the “R” or “P” position as
required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-
ated.
OMG045005
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Automatic
mode
Sports
mode
49
Driving your vehicle
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-
dency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) while
in Sport mode will help prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards.
Ignition key inter lock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. If the ignition switch is in any
other position, the key cannot be
removed.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the Automatic Transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle out of P (Park)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to
the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
sound near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever should fail to move from
the P (Park) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
S/Lock override access hole which is
located on the right side of the shift
lever.
2. Insert the screwdriver or key into the
access hole and press down on the
key.
3. Depress the lock release button and
move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealership immediately.
OMG045061
Driving your vehicle
104
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would.The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Parking brake
Depressing the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
(Continued)
411
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and it's
time for new pads, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes.You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
To avoid costly brake repairs, do not
continue to drive with worn brake pads.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking per-
formance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
Always replace brake pads as com-
plete front or rear axle sets.
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may result in the vehi-
cle not to slow down at the usual
rate and make it pull to one side
when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
Driving your vehicle
124
Power adjustable pedals
(if equipped)
To adjust the position of the accelerator
and brake pedals, turn the ignition key to
the “ON” position with the selector lever
in the "P" position and push the switch.
If you push the “▲” portion of the switch,
the pedals move rearward.
If you push the “▼” portion of the switch,
the pedals move forward.
Setting the driver's position
1. Be sure the parking brake is engaged.
2. Move the accelerator and brake ped-
als to the front most position by push-
ing the “▼” portion of the switch.
3. Adjust the seat position and the steer-
ing wheel angle properly.
4. Move the pedals toward you until you
can fully depress the brake pedal by
pushing the “▲” portion of the switch.
5. Depress the pedals a few times to get
used to the feel after adjusting.
OGH026050N
WARNING - Pedal adjust-
ment
• Adjust the pedals after parking
the vehicle on level ground.Never
attempt to adjust the pedals while
the vehicle is moving.
• Never adjust the pedals with your
foot on the accelerator pedal as
this may result in increasing the
engine speed and acceleration.
• Make sure that you can fully
depress the brake pedal before
driving. Otherwise, you may not
be able to hold down the brake
pedal firmly in an emergency
stop.
413
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, depress the
parking brake pedal fully and firmly
downward while applying the service
brake.
Manual release
To release the parking brake, pull the
parking brake release lever while apply-
ing the service brake. The pedal will
automatically extend to the fully released
position. If the parking brake pedal
does not release or does not release all
the way, have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive brake
pad and brake rotor wear.
1GHA3011 1GHA3012
WARNING - Parking brake
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely posi-
tioned in P (Park).
• Never allow a person who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle or children
to touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released unin-
tentionally, serious injury may
occur.
Driving your vehicle
144
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated
when the parking brake is applied with
the ignition switch in the START or ON
position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released, there
may be a malfunction in the brake sys-
tem. Immediate attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-
tion or repair shop.
Parking on curbed streets
• When parking your vehicle on an uphill
grade, park as close to the curb as
possible and turn the front wheels
away from the curb so that the front
wheels will contact the curb if the vehi-
cle moves backward.
• When parking your vehicle on a down-
hill grade, park as close to the curb as
possible and turn the front wheels
toward the curb so that the front
wheels will contact the curb if the vehi-
cle moves forward.
W-75
415
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The ABS system continuously senses
the speed of the wheels.If the wheels are
going to lock, the ABS system repeated-
ly modulates the hydraulic brake pres-
sure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS system is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS system in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard as
the situation warrants and allow the ABS
system to control the force being deliv-
ered to the brakes.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
WARNING - ABS Brakes
Your ABS is not a substitute for
good driving judgement. You can
still have an accident. In fact, your
ABS system will probably not be
able to prevent an accident in the
following driving conditions:
• Dangerous driving, such as
neglecting safety precautions,
speeding, or driving too close to
the vehicle in front of you.
• Driving at high speed in situa-
tions providing considerably less
traction, such as wet conditions
where hydroplaning could occur.
• Driving too fast on poor road sur-
faces. The ABS is designed to
improve maximum braking effec-
tiveness on typical highways and
roads in good condition. On poor
road surfaces in poor condition,
the ABS may actually reduce
braking effectiveness.
Driving your vehicle
164
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS system. In this case,
however, your regular brakes will
work normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with your
ABS system. Contact an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road, and
operate your brakes continuously, the
ABS will be active continuously and
the ABS warning light may illuminate.
Pull your car over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS warn-
ing light is off, then your ABS system
is normal. Otherwise, you may have a
problem with the ABS. Contact an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
ABS
W-78
417
Driving your vehicle
Power steering
Power Steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the vehi-
cle. If the engine is off or if the power
steering system becomes inoperative,
the vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steer-
ing checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Never hold the steering wheel against
a stop (extreme right or left turn) for
more than 5 seconds with the engine
running. Holding the steering wheel
for more than 5 seconds in either posi-
tion may cause damage to the power
steering pump.
• If the power steering drive belt breaks
or if the power steering pump mal-
functions, the steering effort will
greatly increase.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather (below -
10 °C/14 °F), the power steering may
require increased effort when the engine
is first started. This is caused by
increased fluid viscosity due to the cold
weather and does not indicate a mal-
function.
When this happens, increase the engine
RPM by depressing the accelerator until
the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release
or let the engine idle for two or three
minutes to warm up the fluid.
STEERING WHEEL
Driving your vehicle
184
Tilt steering (if equipped)
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive.You
can also raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
up the lock release lever (
➀
), adjust the
steering wheel to the desired angle (
➁
),
then release the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure
to adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position before driving.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of steering
wheel while driving.You may lose
your steering control and cause
severe personal injury or acci-
dents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
OGH026028 OGH026030
CAUTION
• To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustra-
tion). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
• Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.
419
Driving your vehicle
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without resting your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
With cruise control, you can set and
automatically maintain any speed of
between 24 mph (40 km/h) and
125 mph (200 km/h).
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF button on
the steering wheel, to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 24 mph (40 km/h)
and less than 125 mph (200 km/h).
3.Depress the COAST/SET switch,
located on the steering wheel, and
release it at the speed you want. The
“SET” indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate. Release the
accelerator at the same time. The
desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
The SET function cannot be activated
until approximately 2 seconds after the
CRUISE ON/OFF button has been
engaged.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while going
downhill.
CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Cruise
control
Do not use the cruise control fea-
ture under the following conditions:
• Heavy or unsteady traffic
• Slippery or winding roads
• Situations that involve varying
speeds
WARNING
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated) the
cruise control can be switched on
accidentally. Keep the cruise con-
trol system off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when cruise control is
not in use.
OGH046335N OGH046336N
Driving your vehicle
204
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral).
• Depress the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Depress the COAST/SET and
RES/ACCEL switches at the same
time.
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the “SET” indicator
light in the instrument cluster will go
OFF), but it will not turn the system off.If
you wish to resume cruise control opera-
tion, depress the RES/ACCEL switch
located on your steering wheel. You will
return to your previously preset speed.
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Push the CRUISE ON/OFF button on
the steering wheel (the CRUISE indi-
cator light in the instrument cluster will
go OFF).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con-
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To Set Cruise Control
Speed” on the previous page.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Depress the RES/ACCEL switch and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the switch at the speed you
want.
• Depress the RES/ACCEL switch and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
by one touch and will be memorized to
the reset speed.
OGH046337N
421
Driving your vehicle
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Depress the COAST/SET switch and
hold it.Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the switch at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Depress the COAST/SET switch and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
by one touch and will be memorized to
the reset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than 24 mph (40 km/h):
If any method other than the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch was used to cancel cruis-
ing speed and the system is still activat-
ed, the most recent set speed will auto-
matically resume when the RES/ACCEL
switch is depressed.
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below 24 mph
(40km/h).
OGH046336N OGH046337N
Driving your vehicle
224
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
monitors information from various vehicle
sensors and then compares the driver's
commands with the actual behavior of
the vehicle. If an unstable condition is
created by the driver - a sudden evasive
movement for example - ESC intervenes
within fractions of a second via the
engine computer and brake system and
attempts to stabilize the vehicle.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-
cator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button to
turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indi-
cator will illuminate). To turn
the ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF indica-
tor light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle.This is only the
effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm (revo-
lutions per minute) to
increase.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
-
ESC
OGH036003N
423
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF indicator light illu-
minates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC is
off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the ESC
will automatically turn on
again.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on when
either the ESC is turned off with the but-
ton, or ESC fails to operate when turned
on.
ESC
OFF
ESC
ESC
OFF
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESC indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
Driving your vehicle
244
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned
on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the
ESC OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
Never press ESC OFF button while ESC
is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-
ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When measuring the vehicle speed
with a Chassis dynamo-meter, make
sure the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF
light illuminated). If the ESC is left
on, it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and cause a false
diagnosis of a faulty speedometer.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
425
Driving your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
OGH029034N
1.Tachometer
2.Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5.Warning and indicator lights
6. Odometer / Tripmeter
7. Shift position indicator
8. Fuel gauge
9. LCD screen
✶
Driving your vehicle
264
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle’s parking lights or head-
lights are on, rotate the illumination con-
trol knob to adjust the instrument panel
illumination intensity.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approxi-
mate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
The tachometer pointer may move slight-
ly when the ignition switch is in ACC or
ON position with the engine OFF. This
movement is normal and will not affect
the accuracy of the tachometer once the
engine is running.
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine.If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in the Index.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine dam-
age.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” position, it indicates overheat-
ing that may damage the engine.
OGH036903N
WARNING
Speedometer and Odometer is cal-
culated according to the tire size.
Therefore, if you do not use the tire
recommended for the vehicle, the
calculation of the Speedometer and
Odometer may be incorrect.
427
Driving your vehicle
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
Fuel tank capacity - 18.49 US gal. (70
liters).
The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low
fuel warning light, which will illuminate
when the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving,
including odometer, tripmeter, driving
time, average speed, average fuel con-
sumption, instant fuel consumption and
distance to empty on the display when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
All stored driving information (except
odometer) is reset if the battery is dis-
connected.
TRIP Button
Push the TRIP button for less than 1
second to select tripmeter function as fol-
lows:
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must obtain additional fuel as
soon as possible after the warning
light comes on or when the gauge
indicator comes close to the E
level.
OGH029036
TRIP A TRIP B
Driving your vehicle
284
Odometer (mi.)
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
Tripmeter (mi.)
TRIP A :Tripmeter A
TRIP B :Tripmeter B
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 miles.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or
TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the
tripmeter to zero (0.0).
MODE Button
Push the MODE Button for less than 1
second to select distance to empty, aver-
age fuel consumption , instant fuel con-
sumption, average speed, elapsed time
function as follows:
OGH029037N OGH029038N OGH029039
Distance to empty
Instant fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Elapsed time
Average speed
429
Driving your vehicle
Distance to empty (mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 30 miles, “--
-” will be displayed and the distance to
empty indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 30 to
999 miles.
Average fuel consumption (MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average con-
sumption reset.The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 0.03 miles.
Pressing the MODE button for more than
1 second, when the average fuel con-
sumption is being displayed, clears the
average fuel consumption to zero (---).
If the vehicle speed exceeds 0.6mph
after refueled than 1.6 gallons(6L), the
average fuel consumption will be cleared
to zero(---).
Instant fuel consumption (MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption every 2 second from the
driving distance and quantity of fuel
injection.
OGH029300N OGH029301L OGH029302L
Driving your vehicle
304
Average speed (MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the MODE button for more than
1 second, when the average speed is
being displayed, clears the average
speed to zero (---).
If 2 hours have passed after the ignition
switch is OFF, the average speed will be
cleared to zero(---).
Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going while the engine
is running.
The meter’s working range is from
00:00~99:59.
Pressing the MODE button for more than
1 second, when the driving time is being
displayed, clears the driving time to zero
(00:00).
If 2 hours have passed after the ignition
switch is OFF, the elapsed time will be
cleared to zero(---).
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to
empty values may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an esti-
mate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
OGH029303L OGH029304L
431
Driving your vehicle
Warning lights / audible indica-
tors
Checking operation
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine).Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off.The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
(if equipped)
This light illuminates if the key is turned
to ON and goes off approximately 3 sec-
onds if the system is operating normally.
If the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS system. Contact
an authorized Kia dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Electronic brake force
distribution (EBD) sys-
tem warning light
(if equipped)
If two warning lights illumi-
nate at the same time while
driving, your vehicle has a
problem with ABS and EBD
system.
In this case, your ABS system and regu-
lar brake system may not work normally.
Have the vehicle checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
ABS
ABS
WARNING
If both ABS and Brake warning
lights are ON and stay ON, your
vehicle’s brake system will not work
normally. In such a case, you may
experience an unexpected and dan-
gerous situation when braking
abruptly.When both ABS and brake
lights are on, avoid high speed driv-
ing and abrupt braking. Have your
vehicle checked by an Authorized
Kia Dealer as soon as possible.
Driving your vehicle
324
Engine oil pressure
warning
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2.With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
Charging system
warning
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2.With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an Authorized
Kia Dealer correct the problem as
soon as possible.
Safety belt warning
If the driver’s lap/shoulder belt is not fas-
tened when the key is turned ON or if it is
unfastened after the key is ON, the safe-
ty belt warning light blinks until the belt is
fastened.
If the system does not operate as
described, see an Authorized Kia Dealer
for assistance.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped imme-
diately, severe damage could result.
433
Driving your vehicle
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This light comes on when the front fog
lights are ON.
Shift pattern
indicators
The individual indicators illuminate to
show the shift lever selection.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required.Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have it towed to any Authorized Kia
Dealer for a brake system inspection
and necessary repairs.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, have the
brakes checked and repaired imme-
diately by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
Driving your vehicle
344
Trunk lid open
warning
This warning light activates when the
trunk is not closed securely.
Low fuel level
warning
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. The warning light will
come on when the fuel level has dropped
to about 2.38 US gal. (9 liters). Refuel as
soon as possible.
Door open
display
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the igni-
tion in any position. And the door open
display will illuminate the corresponding
position light which door is not closed
securely.
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
This light illuminates when the immobiliz-
er key is inserted and turned to the ON
position to start the engine.
If this light turns off or blinks when the
ignition switch is in the ON position
before starting the engine, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized Kia
Dealer.
Headlight high beam
indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indi-
cates that a potential problem has been
detected somewhere in the emission
control system.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable and will not need towing, but
have the system checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
✽✽
NOTICE
A loose fuel filler cap may cause the On
Board Diagnostic System Malfunction
Indicator Light ( ) in the instrument
panel to illuminate unnecessarily.
Always make sure that the fuel filler cap
is tight.
TRUNK
OPEN!
LOW
FUEL
DOOR
OPEN!
435
Driving your vehicle
Air bag warning
(if equipped)
This warning light will blink or illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds each time
you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
If this indicator does not go out, or if it illu-
minates while the vehicle is being driven,
see an Authorized Kia Dealer for immedi-
ate service.
Low
washer
fluid level
warning indicator (if equipped)
This warning light indicates the washer
fluid reservoir is nearly empty. Refill the
washer fluid as soon as possible.
Auto cruise indicator
(if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise control system is enabled.
SET indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise function switch (COAST/ SET or
RES/ACCEL) is ON.
CAUTION
• Prolonged driving with the
Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light
( ) illuminated may cause dam-
age to the emission control sys-
tems which could effect drivabili-
ty and/or fuel economy.
•
If the
Emission
Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light ( )
begins to flash ON and OFF,
potential catalytic converter dam-
age is possible which could result
in loss of engine power. Have the
Engine Control System inspected
as soon as possible by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
AIR
BAG
LOW WASHER
LIQUID!
CRUISE
SET
Driving your vehicle
364
ESC indicator
(Electronic Stability
Control) (if equipped)
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions and under normal
driving conditions, the ESC light will
remain off. When a slippery or low trac-
tion condition is encountered, the ESC
will operate, and the ESC indicator will
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
ESC OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated. If this indicator
stays on in the ESC ON mode, the ESC
may have a malfunction.Take your car to
an authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
Safety belt warning chime
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition key is turned “ON” or if
it is disconnected after the key is ON, the
safety belt warning chime will sound for
approximately 6 seconds.
Key reminder warning chime
If the driver’s door is opened and the igni-
tion key is left in the ignition switch in the
LOCK or ACC position, the key reminder
warning chime will sound. This is to pre-
vent you from locking your keys in the
vehicle.
ESC
ESC
OFF
437
Driving your vehicle
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
The low tire pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position.
If the warning light does not come on, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not
working properly.If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
This warning light will also illuminate if
one or more of your tires are significantly
under-inflated.
You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible. If the warning lights
illuminate while driving, reduce vehicle
speed immediately and stop the vehicle.
Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting at
the steering wheel. Inflate the tires to the
proper pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s tire information placard.
TPMS (Tire pressure
monitoring system)
malfunction indicator
TPMS malfunction indicator illuminates
for 3 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position. If the warn-
ing light does not come on, or continu-
ously remains on after the 3-second bulb
check when you turned the ignition key to
the "ON" position, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System is not working proper-
ly. If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
The warning light also comes on and
stays on when there is a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If this happens, the system may not mon-
itor the tire pressure. Have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
TPMS
WARNING
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and increased braking distances.
Continued driving on low pressure
tires will cause the tires to overheat
and fail.
WARNING
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.
Driving your vehicle
384
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the exterior light when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parklight will be
turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on when
the ignition key is removed, perform the
following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parklights OFF and ON again
using the light switch on the steering
column.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parklight position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
➀
OFF position
➁
Parklight position
➂
Headlight position
➃
Auto light position
Parklight position ( )
When the light switch is in the parklight
position (1st position), the tail, position,
license and instrument panel lights are
ON.
LIGHTING
1GHA20531GHA2055A
439
Driving your vehicle
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position (2nd position) the head, tail,
position, license and instrument panel
lights are ON.
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Never place anything over sensor (
➀
)
located on the instrument panel, this
will ensure better auto-light system
control.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the Auto light system may
not work properly.
1GHA2053A OGH026042
CAUTION
Don’t clean the sensor using a win-
dow cleaner, the cleanser may leave
a light film which could interfere
with sensor operation.
Driving your vehicle
404
High - beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you.Pull it back
for low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
Flashing headlights
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low-beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
Turn signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down.
Green arrow indicators on the instrument
panel indicate which turn signal is oper-
ating. They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.
1GHA2210A 2GHA20552GHA2211A
Right turn
Left turn
Left lane
change
Right lane
change
441
Driving your vehicle
Lane change signals
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position.
The lever will return to the OFF position
when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, bulb may be burned out or have
a poor electrical connection in the cir-
cuit.
Automatic headlight aiming
(if equipped)
To provide better driver visibility and
reduce eye fatigue, the headlight aiming
(direction) is automatically controlled
depending on vehicle load and vehicle
angle (when vehicle is loaded with pas-
sengers, cargo or used for towing, the
additional load can alter the headlight
aiming point on the road surface). This
system provides constant automatic
headlight aiming under various vehicle
conditions and angles to ensure the
headlights are always pointed in the right
direction.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility and avoid accidents when visibil-
ity is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc.
The fog lights will turn on when fog light
switch (
➀
) is turned to ON (
➁
) after the
headlight switch is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch
to OFF.
✽✽
NOTICE
When in operation, the fog lights con-
sume large amounts of vehicle electrical
power. Only use the fog lights when vis-
ibility is poor or unnecessary battery
and generator drain could occur.
CAUTION
If the automatic headlight aiming
system does not operate when the
vehicle is loaded with passengers
and the front portion of the vehicle
is at an elevated angle, or it is not
adjusting correctly,have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an author-
ized Kia dealer. Do not attempt to
adjust the headlights manually,
damage to the automatic headlight
aiming system could occur.
1GHA2063
➀
➁
Driving your vehicle
424
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
MIST: For a single wiping cycle, push the
lever forward and release it with
the lever in the OFF position.The
wipers will operate continuously if
the lever is pushed upward and
held.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT :Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in a light rain or mist.To
vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob(
➀
).
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
Variable intermittent wipers
Set the lever to the INT position and
choose the desired wiper interval by turn-
ing the ring (
➀
).
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OGH048901N OGH048902N
1
443
Driving your vehicle
One - touch wiper
For a single wiping cycle, push the lever
upward and release it with the lever in the
OFF position.
The wipers will operate continuously if
the lever is pushed upward and held.
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield and to run the wipers 2-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
OGH048903N
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
OGH048904N
Driving your vehicle
444
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the heater contorl panel. The
indicator on the rear window defroster
button illuminates when the defroster is
ON.
If your vehicle is equipped with the front
windshield deicer, it will be operating at
the same time when you operate the rear
window defroster.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before oper-
ating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes or when the
ignition switch is turned off.To turn off the
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button again.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
contact with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
DEFROSTER
OGH026044
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
445
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• To prevent damage to the conductors
bonded to the inside surface of the
bottom of the front windshield and the
rear window, never use sharp instru-
ments or window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
• To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, operate the defroster only
while the engine is running.
• The front windshield defroster is
designed to defrost wiper blades. If
you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging” in this sec-
tion.
The hazard warning flasher causes the
rear tail lights and front turn signal lights
to flash on and off, which serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise cau-
tion when approaching or passing your
vehicle.
To activate the flasher, depress the haz-
ard warning flasher switch. This switch
operates in any ignition switch position.
To turn the flashers off, depress the
switch again.
OGH026040
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
Driving your vehicle
464
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
OGH026051N/OGH026052
1. A/C display
2. Driver’s temperature control button
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. Air conditioning button
5. Fan speed control button
6. Mode selection button
7. Dual temperature control selection button
8. Front windshield defrost button
9. Rear window defrost button
10. OFF button
11. Recirculated air position button
12. Outside (fresh) air position button
13. Passenger’s temperature control button
14. Rear climate control selection button
447
Driving your vehicle
Automatic operation
The automatic climate control system is
controlled by simply setting the desired
temperature.
The Full Automatic Temperature Control
(FATC) system automatically controls the
heating and cooling system as follows;
1. Push the AUTO button. The indicator
light will come on and the modes, fan
speeds, air intake and air-conditioning
will be controlled automatically by tem-
perature setting.
2. Push the TEMP button to set the
desired temperature.
If the temperature is set to the lowest
setting 62°F/17°C (Lo), the air condi-
tioning system will operate continu-
ously.
3.To turn the automatic operation off,
press any button except temperature
control button. If you press the mode
selection button, air-conditioning but-
ton, defrost button, recirculated air
position button, outside (fresh) air
position button or fan speed button,
the selected function will be controlled
manually while other functions operate
automatically.
Regardless of the temperature setting,
when using automatic operation, the air
conditioning system will automatically
turn on to decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle, even if the temperature is set
to warm.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
OGH026053 1GHA2233
Driving your vehicle
484
Manual operation
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually as well by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button. In
this case, the system works sequentially
according to the order of buttons select-
ed.
When pressing any button except AUTO,
the functions of the buttons not selected
will be controlled automatically.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
Temperature control button
The temperature will increase to the
maximum 90°F/32°C (HI) by pushing the
up button. Each push of the button will
cause the temperature to increase by
1°F/0.5 °C.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum 62°F/17°C (Lo) by pushing the
down button.Each push of the button will
cause the temperature to decrease by
1°F/0.5°C. When set to the lowest tem-
perature setting, the air conditioning will
operate continuously.
Dual temperature control selec-
tion button
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually (the indicator light in the
button illuminates). Pressing the right
temperature control button will auto-
matically switch to the DUAL mode as
well.
2. Press the left temperature control to
adjust the driver side temperature.
Press the right temperature control to
adjust the passenger side tempera-
ture.
OGH026060NOGH026059N
449
Driving your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again or if you
select the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo)
temperature, the DUAL mode deacti-
vates (the indicator light in the button
turns off).The passenger side temper-
ature will be set to the same tempera-
ture as the driver side.
2. Press the left temperature control but-
ton. The driver and passenger side
temperature will be adjusted equally.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode will
reset as Centigrade degrees.
This is normal condition and you can
switch the temperature mode between
Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;
While depressing the MODE button,
depress the DUAL button for 3 seconds
or more. The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
Fan speed control button
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by turning the appropriate fan
speed control knob.
The higher the fan speed is, the more air
is delivered.
Pressing the “OFF” button turns off the
fan.
Air intake control button
This is used to select outside (fresh) air
position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
OGH026062
Driving your vehicle
504
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the button is illumi-
nated when the recirculated air position
button is depressed.
With the recirculated air position select-
ed, air from the passenger compartment
will be drawn through the heating system
and heated or cooled according to the
function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the button is illumi-
nated when the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion button is depressed.
With the outside (fresh) air position
selected, air enters the vehicle from out-
side and is heated or cooled according to
the function selected.
When starting the vehicle, the system is
automatically set to the outside (fresh) air
position. Press the button once to select
the recirculated air position.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heating in
recirculated air position will cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the “recirculated air posi-
tion” selected, will result in excessively
dry air in the passenger compartment.
OGH026061N
WARNING
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air
conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the reciruclated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driv-
ing.
OGH026063N
451
Driving your vehicle
Mode selection button
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
OGH026056
OGH026055N
Driving your vehicle
524
Face position
Air flow is directed toward the
upper body and face.
Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air dis-
charged from the outlet.
(outlet port: )
Face - floor position
Air flow is directed towards the
face and the floor. The air to
the floor is warmer than the air
to the face (except when the
temperature control is set to
the extreme cold position).
(outlet port: , , )
Floor position
Most of the air flow is directed
to the floor, with a small
amount of the air being direct-
ed to the windshield and side
window defroster.
(outlet port: , , , )
Floor - defrost position
Most of the air flow is directed
to the floor and the windshield
with a small amount directed to
the side window defrosters.
(outlet port: , , , )
Defrost button
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
(outlet port: , )
When the defrost button is pressed, the
outside (fresh) air position will automati-
cally be selected and air will be dis-
charged through the windshield defrost
vents. The air conditioning will automati-
cally operate based on ambient tempera-
ture.
B
B
C
A
E
E
C
D
E
A
C D
OGH026058
A
D
453
Driving your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel vents. The outlet
port ( ) can be opened or closed sepa-
rately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using vertical
or horizontal thumbwheels as shown.
Air conditioning button
Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-
tioning system on (indicator light will illu-
minate).
Push the button again to turn the air con-
ditioning system off.
OFF button
Push the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However you can
still operate the mode and air intake but-
tons as long as the ignition switch is ON.
OGH026057N
B
OGH026064 OGH026065
Driving your vehicle
544
Air conditioning system opera-
tion tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehi-
cle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in the engine speed as
the air conditioning compressor cycles
on. This is a normal system operation
characteristics.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even pudding) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristics.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position does
provide maximum cooling, however,
continual operation in this mode may
cause the air inside the vehicle to
become stale.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-
ence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
When the performance of the air
conditioning system is reduced it is
important that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the
compressor and abnormal system
operation may occur.
CAUTION
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up hills
or in heavy traffic when outside
temperatures are high. Air condi-
tioning system operation may
cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan but
turn the air conditioning system off
if the temperature gauge indicates
engine overheating.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized Kia
dealer. Improper service may cause
serious injury to the person per-
forming the service.
455
Driving your vehicle
Rear climate control
The rear climate control system allows
the rear passengers to adjust the tem-
perature and airflow distribution using the
control panel located on the back of the
center console, facing the rear passen-
ger compartment. The rear climate con-
trol system only operates when the front
climate control system is on and, sup-
plements the functions of the front cli-
mate control system for increased rear
passenger comfort.
Operating the rear climate control
system
To operate the rear climate control sys-
tem, perform the following:
1. Press the rear climate control selec-
tion button in the front control panel
( ) (the indicator light in the button
illuminates).
2.Turn the temperature control knob
located between the vents on the rear
control panel to adjust the tempera-
ture. Turn the knob up (RED mark)
when warm air is desired, or down
(BLUE mark) when cool air is desired.
3. Adjust the direction of the airflow using
the vent control lever.
REAR
REAR
OGH026068
OGH026070
OGH026071
Driving your vehicle
564
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The air-conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the or
position.
2. Set temperature to the extreme hot
(77~90°F / 25~32°C) position.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The air-conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control button to the hot posi-
tion and the fan speed control button to
the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
selection button to the floor- defrost
position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up
inside of the windshield.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING
Do not use defrost position during
cooling operation in extremely
humid weather. The difference
between the temperature of the out-
side air and that of the windshield
could cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility.
OGH026075N OGH026076N
5
Fuel requirements / 5-2
Emission control system / 5-3
Before driving / 5-5
Suggestions for economical operation / 5-6
Special driving conditions / 5-7
Vehicle load limit / 5-13
Weight of the vehicle / 5-17
Trailer towing / 5-18
Label information / 5-25
Homelink
®
wireless control system / 5-27
Driving tips
Driving tips
25
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Gasoline engine (unleaded)
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel with a minimum
Octane Rating of 87 Anti-Knock Index
(AKI).
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2.Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any gaso-
hol product which impairs drivability.
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control sys-
tem’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what Kia has specified. (Consult an
Authorized Kia Dealer for details.)
53
Driving tips
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Warranty &
Consumer Information Manual in your
vehicle.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your Kia could affect its
performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately by an authorized
Kia dealer or other competent repair
shop. If you ever suspect exhaust
fumes are coming into your vehicle,
drive it only with all the windows fully
open. Have your vehicle checked and
repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to re-start the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
WARNING
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though color-
less and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions following to
avoid CO poisoning.
Driving tips
45
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-
line engine (unleaded).
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.
If your run out of gasoline, it could
cause the engine to misfire and result
in excessive loading of the catalytic
converter.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by a qualified techni-
cian.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
WARNING - Fire
A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park the vehicle over or
near flammable objects, such as
dry grass, paper, leaves, etc.
55
Driving tips
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle:
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in
Section 7, Maintenance.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
WARNING
- Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink and
drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
Driving while under the influence of
drugs is as dangerous or more dan-
gerous than driving drunk.
Driving tips
65
SUGGESTIONS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
kilometers (miles) you can get from a liter
(gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the fol-
lowing driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling.Once the
engine is running smoothly, begin driv-
ing. Remember, engine warm-up may
take a little longer on cold days.
• Save fuel by accelerating slowly after
stopping.
• Keep the engine in tune and follow the
recommended periodic maintenance
schedule. This will increase the life of
all parts and lower your operating
costs.
• Do not use the air conditioner unnec-
essarily.
• Slow down when driving on rough
roads.
• For longer tire life and better fuel econ-
omy, always keep the tires inflated to
the recommended pressures.
• Maintain a safe distance from other
vehicles to avoid sudden stops. This
will reduce wear on brake linings and
pads. Driving in such a way will also
save fuel because extra fuel is required
to accelerate back to driving speed.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in the
vehicle.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
needless wear, possible damage to the
brakes, and poor fuel economy.
• Improper wheel alignment results in
faster tire wear and lower fuel econo-
my.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds.To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety.Therefore, have an authorized Kia
dealer perform scheduled inspections
and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function with-
out the engine running. Instead,
downshift to an appropriate gear for
engine braking effect.
57
Driving tips
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in braking or
steering.
• When braking, pump the brake pedal
with a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehi-
cle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels.Then,
shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transaxle.Do
not race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still stuck
after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled
out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine
overheating and possible damage to the
transaxle.
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slip-
pery surfaces.
Driving tips
85
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged rocking may cause engine
over-heating, transaxle damage or fail-
ure, and tire damage.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
WARNING
- Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 35 mph (56
km/h). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tire to overheat,
explode and injure bystanders.
59
Driving tips
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking oper-
ation returns.
Winter driving
• We recommend that you carry emer-
gency equipment, including tire chains,
a window scraper, windshield de-icer,
a bag of sand or salt, flares, a small
shovel and jumper cables.
• Make sure you have sufficient ethyl-
ene-glycol coolant in the radiator.
• Check the battery condition and
cables. Cold temperatures reduce the
capacity of any battery, so it must be in
excellent condition to provide enough
winter starting power.
• Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for cold weather.
• Check the ignition system for loose
connections and damage.
• Use antifreeze-formulated windshield
washer fluid. (Do not use engine
coolant antifreeze.)
• Do not use the parking brake if it might
freeze. When parking, shift to P (Park)
with an automatic transaxle and block
the rear wheels.
Driving tips
105
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your Kia,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions.Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehi-
cle's original equipment tires.You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-
imum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thin-
ner, they can be damaged by mounting
some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is recom-
mended instead of snow chains. Do not
mount tire chains on vehicles equipped
with aluminum wheels, snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels. If snow
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than 0.47
(12 mm) for tire treads and sidewall. Do
not fully turn the steering wheel (turning
the steering wheel one way to the end)
with your snow chains installed. In case,
you fully turn your steering wheel, you
must drive at the speed less than 10km/h.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper snow chain use is not covered
by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.
Install them only on the front tires.
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tires.Otherwise, the safety and
handling of your vehicle may be
adversely affected.
1GHN2135
511
Driving tips
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S”certified. Cable-
type, or plastic-type snow chain
can also be used.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.5 to 1 km to
ensure safe mounting. Retighten
or remount the chains if they are
loose.
WARNING
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in
park (P), apply the parking brake
and turn off the engine before
installing snow chains.
WARNING
- Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other road
hazards, which may cause the
vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
Driving tips
125
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
HLA (Hydraulic Lash Adjuster)
noise
The engine HLA's keep the gap between
the valve and cam at zero regardless of
the valve expansion.
Occasionally, you may hear a temporary
or continuous sound (clatter) from the
engine when starting or idling.This noise
will usually go away by following a few
simple steps:
If the temporary sound occurs when
starting a cold engine:
This is a normal condition. This sound
will disappear after the engine oil has
reached normal operating pressure.
If the sound occurs when starting the
engine after the engine has not been oper-
ated for more than 48 hours; or engine
has been cranked excessively:
This condition may be caused by oil
draining from the HLA's.This allows air to
enter the HLA causing insufficient lubri-
cating oil in the HLA.This will usually dis-
appear within 15 minutes with the engine
running at 2000~3000 rpm. If the sound
does not disappear, have the engine oil
pressure, engine lubrication system and
HLA's inspected by an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine at more than
3000 rpm until the noise goes away.
Damage to the HLA's could occur.
513
Driving tips
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle capacity weight:
860 lbs (390 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo.If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
P235/55R17
P235/55R17
P235/55R17
390 860
860
390
OGH056900N
P235/55R17
210kPa, 30psi
210kPa, 30psi
420kPa, 60psi
P235/55R17
T125/80D16
390 860
860
390
OGH056910N
Type A
Type B
P225/60R16
P225/60R16
P235/55R17
390 860
860
390
OGH056912N
210kPa, 30psi
210kPa, 30psi
420kPa, 60psi
T125/80D16
390 860
860
390
P225/60R16
P225/60R16
OGH056913N
Type C
Type D
Tire and loading information label
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire
pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be
in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.
Driving tips
145
Towing capacity:
Without trailer brakes:
1000 lbs (454 kg)
With trailer brakes:
2000 lbs (908 kg)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trail-
er.
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. (635 kg), and there will be five
150 lbs. (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (295 kg).
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs. or
635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle.Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
515
Driving tips
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
(136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
1100 lbs
Luggage weight (499 kg)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
(340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
650 lbs
Luggage weight (295 kg)
ABC
Example 2
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
860 lbs
172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
(390 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
540 lbs
Luggage weight (245 kg)
ABC
Example 3
Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions.The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
Driving tips
165
Compliance label
The compliance label is located on
the driver's door sill.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not overload your vehicle.
• Using heavier suspension compo-
nents to get added durability
might not change your weight rat-
ings. Ask your dealer to help you
load your vehicle the right way.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
1JBN5901
WARNING - Over loading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage.You can calculate the
weight of your load by weigh-
ing the items (or people)
before putting them in the
vehicle. Be careful not to over-
load your vehicle.
• Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, either
the maximum front or rear
GAWR and vehicle capacity
weight.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If you do, parts, including tires
on your vehicle can break, and
it can change the way your
vehicle handles and braking
ability.This could cause you to
lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
517
Driving tips
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle.If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance.Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the compliance
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the compliance label
located on the driver’s door sill.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Items you carry inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
occupants in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle.Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Never stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
• Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
WEIGHT OF THE VEHICLE
Driving tips
185
TRAILER TOWING
✽✽
NOTICE
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs
not covered by your warranty. To pull a
trailer correctly, follow the advice in this
section.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the infor-
mation in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Remember
that trailering is different than just driving
your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability, and fuel
economy. Successful, safe trailering
requires correct equipment, and it has to
be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
WARNING
- Towing a trail-
er
If you don't use the correct equip-
ment and drive properly, you can
lose control when you pull a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy,the brakes may not work well
- or even at all. You and your pas-
sengers could be seriously or fatal-
ly injured. Pull a trailer only if you
have followed all the steps in this
section.
Item Specification
Maximum trailer Without trailer brakes 1000 (454)
weight lbs. (kg) With trailer brakes 2000 (908)
519
Driving tips
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight.The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control.You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
• After your odometer indicates 500
miles (800 km) or more, you can tow a
trailer. For the first 500 miles (800 km)
that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make
starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle
“wear” in at the heavier loads.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-
ate speed (Less than 100 km/h).
• The important considerations have to
do with weight:
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than 2000 lbs.
(908 kg) with trailer brakes. But even that
can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
Driving tips
205
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
After you've loaded your trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct them
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
Hitches
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few rea-
sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to
seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a frame-
mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
WARNING
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trail-
er towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
521
Driving tips
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-
ufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1000 lbs.
(454 kg) loaded, then it needs its own
brakes and they must be adequate. Be
sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to
install, adjust and maintain them proper-
ly.
• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-
tem.
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-
ing and then apply the trailer brake con-
troller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working.This lets you check your electri-
cal connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still work-
ing.
WARNING
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experi-
enced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
Driving tips
225
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-
cle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll
need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide
you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trail-
er bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you discon-
nect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring har-
ness.
Your Authorized Kia Dealer can assist
you in installing the wiring harness.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in dam-
age to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
523
Driving tips
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70
km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than 1000 lbs.
(454 kg) and you have an automatic
transaxle, you should drive in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup
and extend the life of your transaxle.
Parking on hills
Generally, you should not park your vehi-
cle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.
People can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer can
be damaged if they begin a downhill tra-
jectory.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not over-
heat. If the needle of the coolant
temperature gauge moves across
the dial towards “H” (HOT), pull
over and stop as soon as it is safe
to do so, and allow the engine to
idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
WARNING
- Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause serious
injury or death, should a down hill
trajectory happen.
Driving tips
245
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift into
gear.
2. Have someone place chocks under
the trailer wheels.
3.When the wheel chocks are in place,
release the brakes until the chocks
absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your park-
ing brake, and then shift to P (Park) for
an automatic transaxle.
5. Release the brakes.
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1.With the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold the
brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2.Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular atten-
tion include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer
and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, con-
duct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts
and bolts should be tight.
WARNING
- Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly.You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
CAUTION
Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur in
hot days or during uphill driving. If
the coolant gauge indicates over-
heating, switch off the A/C and stop
the vehicle in a safe area to cool
down the engine.
525
Driving tips
LABEL INFORMATION
There are several important labels and
identification numbers located on your
vehicle. The label locations are identified
in the illustrations follows:
Vehicle identification number
(VIN)
OGH067001N 2GHA522
OGH36603N
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
VIN label
VIN bar code
2GHA524
Statement of compliance
Driving tips
265
Tire specification / pressure label Engine number
3GHA523 OGH067003
527
Driving tips
HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your new mirror comes with an integrat-
ed HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
which allows you to program the mirror to
activate your garage door(s), estate gate,
home lighting, etc. The mirror actually
learns the codes from your various exist-
ing transmitters.
MMSA5007
Homelink buttons
Glare detection sensor
Indicator light
WARNING
• When programming the
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System, you may be operating a
garage door or gate operator.
Make sure that people and
objects are out of the way of the
moving door or gate to prevent
potential harm or damage.
• Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by federal safety stan-
dards. (This includes any garage
door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to
stop and reverse, does not meet
current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener with-
out these features increases risk
of serious injury or death. For
more information, call 1-800-355-
3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Retain the original transmitter for
future programming procedures
(i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is
also suggested that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink buttons be erased for
security purposes (follow step 1
in the “Programming” portion of
this text).
Driving tips
285
Programming
Your vehicle may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the ACC position
for programming and/or operation of
HomeLink.It is also recommended that a
new battery be replaced in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink for quicker train-
ing and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency.
Follow these steps to train your
HomeLink mirror:
1.When programming the buttons for the
first time, press and hold the left and
center buttons ( , ) simultan-
iously until the indicator light begins to
flash after approximately 20 seconds.
(This procedure erases the factory-set
default codes.Do Not perform this step
to program additional hand-held trans-
mitters.)
✽✽
NOTICE
For non rolling code garage door open-
ers, follow steps 2 - 3.
For rolling code garage door openers,
follow steps 2 - 6.
For Canadian Programming, please fol-
low the Canadian Programming section.
For help with determining whether your
garage is non-rolling code or rolling
code, please refer to the garage door
openers owner’s manual or contact
HomeLink customer service at 1-800-
355-3515.
MMSA5005
Flashing
529
Driving tips
2. Press and hold the button on the
HomeLink system you wish to train and
the button on the transmitter while the
transmitter is approximately 1 to 3 inches
away from the mirror. Do not release the
buttons until step 3 has been completed.
3.The HomeLink indicator light will flash,
first slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both but-
tons may be released. (The rapid
flashing light indicates successful pro-
gramming of the new frequency sig-
nal.)
✽✽
NOTICE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace step
#3 with the “cycling” procedure noted in
the “Canadian Programming” section
of this document.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped devices) with the
rolling code feature, follow these instruc-
tions after completing the “Programming”
portion of this text. (A second person
may make the following training proce-
dures quicker & easier.)
4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on
the device’s motor head unit. Exact
location and color of the button may
vary by product brand. If there is diffi-
culty locating the “learn” or “smart” but-
ton, reference the device’s owner’s
manual or contact HomeLink at 1-800-
355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
5.Press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button on the device’s motor
head unit. You have 30 seconds to
complete step number 6.
MMSA5006
Flashing
Transmitter
1-3inches
Driving tips
305
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and release the programmed
HomeLink button up to three times.
The rolling code equipped device
should now recognize the HomeLink
signal and activate when the
HomeLink button is pressed. The
remaining two buttons may now be
programmed if this has not previously
been done. Refer to the
“Programming” portion of this text.
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press the pro-
grammed HomeLink button. Activation
will now occur for the trained product
(garage door, security system, entry door
lock, estate gate, or home or office light-
ing). For convenience, the hand-held
transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time. The HomeLink
Wireless Controls System (once pro-
grammed) or the original hand-held
transmitter may be used to activate the
device (e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
etc.). In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties, contact HomeLink
at 1-800-355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
Erasing programmed HomeLink
buttons
To erase the three programmed buttons
(individual buttons cannot be erased):
• Press and hold the left and center
buttons simultaniously, until the indica-
tor light begins to flash (approximately
20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)
mode and can be programmed at any
time.
MMSA5005
Flashing
531
Driving tips
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink button
To program a device to HomeLink using
a HomeLink button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. Do NOT release until step 4
has been completed.
2.When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
away from the HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button (or press and “cycle” - as
described in “Canadian Programming”
above).
4.The HomeLink indicator light will flash,
first slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light begins to flash rapidly,
release both buttons.
The previous device has now been
erased and the new device can be acti-
vated by pushing the HomeLink button
that has just been programmed.This pro-
cedure will not affect any other pro-
grammed HomeLink buttons.
Gate operator programming &
canadian programming
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop trans-
mitting. Continue to press and hold the
HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4
in the “Programming” portion of this text)
while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your handheld transmitter every two sec-
onds until the frequency signal has been
learned. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several sec-
onds upon successful training.
✽✽
NOTICE
If programming a garage door opener
or gate, it is advised to unplug the device
during the “cycling” process to prevent
possible motor burn-up.
Accessories
If you would like additional information on
the HomeLink Wireless Control System,
HomeLink compatible products, or to
purchase other accessories such as the
HomeLink® Lighting Package, please
contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference.
(2) This device must accept any interfer-
ence that may be received including
interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
CAUTION
The transmitter has been tested
and complies with FCC and
DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifi-
cations not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority
to operate the device.
IC: 4112104541A Gentex
MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3
6
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2
Overheating / 6-3
Emergency starting / 6-4
Electrical circuit protection / 6-6
Towing / 6-13
Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-17
If you have a flat tire / 6-22
In case of an emergency
In case of an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle. It
should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Depress the flasher switch with the igni-
tion switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehi-
cle is being towed.
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-
cle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the car slow down while driving
straight ahead. Do not apply the
brakes immediately or attempt to pull
off the road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the car has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the road.
Drive off the road as far as possible
and park on firm, level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not park
in the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
2.When the car is stopped, turn on your
emergency hazard flashers, set the
parking brake and put the transaxle in
P.
OGH026040
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
63
In case of an emergency
3. Have all passengers get out of the car.
Be sure they all get out on the side of
the car that is away from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized KIA dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, if you experience a loss of
power, or if you hear a loud knocking or
pinging noise, the engine has probably
overheated. Should any of these symp-
toms occur, use the following procedure:
1.Turn on the hazard warning flasher,
then drive to the nearest safe location
and stop your vehicle; set the automat-
ic transaxle in P (Park) and apply the
parking brake.
2. Make sure the air conditioner is off.
3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator, stop the engine and call an
Authorized Kia Dealer for assistance.
If coolant is not boiling out, allow the
engine to idle and open the hood to
permit the engine to cool gradually.
If the temperature does not go down
with the engine idling, stop the engine
and allow sufficient time for it to cool.
4.The coolant level should then be
checked. If the level in the reservoir is
low, look for leaks at the radiator hoses
and connections, heater hoses and
connections, radiator, and water
pump.If you find a major leak or anoth-
er problem that may have caused the
engine to overheat, do not operate the
engine until it has been corrected. Call
an Authorized Kia Dealer for assis-
tance.If you do not find a leak or other
problem, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir.
If the engine frequently overheats, have
the cooling system checked and repaired
by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
WARNING - Removing
radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam
may blow out under pressure. This
could cause serious injury.
OVERHEATING
In case of an emergency
46
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures listed on page 6-5. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing service
jump start your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You
can damage a 12-volt starting motor,
ignition system, and other electrical
parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt
power supply (either two 12-volt batter-
ies in series or a 24-volt motor generator
set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
65
In case of an emergency
Connecting jumper cables Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the previous illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive terminal of
the discharged battery (
➀
), then con-
nect the other end to the positive ter-
minal on the booster battery (
➁
).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative ter-
minal of the booster battery (
➂
), then
the other end to a solid, stationary,
metallic point (for example, the engine
lifting bracket) away from the battery
(
➃
). Do not connect it to or near any
part that moves when the engine is
cranked. Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative termi-
nal of the discharged battery.
OGH047001N-1
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
Booster battery
In case of an emergency
66
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct bat-
tery terminals or the correct ground.
Do not lean over the battery when
making connections.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehi-
cle checked by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
Refer to illustration on page 6-5.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
Fuses
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
PROTECTION
1VQA4037
Normal
Normal
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
67
In case of an emergency
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire instead of the
proper fuse - even as a temporary
repair. It may cause extensive
wiring damage and possibly a
fire.
• Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the sys-
tem.
This vehicle has two fuse panels, one
located in the driver's side knee bolster,
the other in the engine compartment
near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an Authorized Kia Dealer.
Fuse replacement
1.Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided on the
main fuse box in the engine compart-
ment.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the fuse
panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
1GHA402
Driver - side knee bolster
In case of an emergency
86
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the radio or room lamp fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical com-
ponents do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse block in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
To check the fuse or relay in the engine
compartment, remove the engine com-
partment shroud.
1.Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by remov-
ing the bolt on the cover and unhook-
ing the tab on one end and tilting the
cover back toward the other end.
3. Check the fuses. If one is blown,
replace it with a new one of the same
rating.
✽✽
NOTICE
After checking the fuse box in the engine
compartment, securely install the fuse
box cover. If not, electrical failures may
occur from water leaking in.
1GHA403A 1GHA404
OGH056001
Engine compartment
➀
➁
➀
Junction Box
➁
Main Fuse
69
In case of an emergency
Main fuse
If the BATT (60A) or ALT (150A) fuse are
blown, it must be removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
4.Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
OGH046004
Engine compartment
91950-3F100
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay
name and capacity.
In case of an emergency
106
Description Fuse rating Protected component
1 FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel pump
2 H/LP (LO-LH) 15A Headlight (low-left)
3 ABS 10A Anti-lock brake system
4 IGN COIL 15A Ignition coil
5 A/CON COMP 10A Air-conditioner compressor
6 ATM 20A Automatic transaxle control relay
7 MAIN 20A Engine control unit relay
8 O2 SNSR 15A Oxygen sensor
9 EGR 15A
Power train control system sensors
10 HORN 15A Horn
11 TAIL 20A Tail light
12 SUNROOF 20A Sun roof
13 P/SEAT (RH) 20A Power seat (right)
14 FOG LP (FR) 15A Fog light (front)
15 H/LP (HI) 15A Headlight (high)
16 SPARE 30A spare fuse
17 SPARE 20A spare fuse
18 SPARE 15A spare fuse
19 SPARE 10A spare fuse
20 P/SEAT (LH) 30A Power seat (left)
21 AMP 20A Radio amplifier
22 DRL* 15A Daytime running light
Engine compartment
Description Fuse rating Protected component
23 H/LP (LO-RH) 15A Headlight (low beam-right)
24 I/P B+ 30A All electrical system
25 ECU 10A Engine control unit
26 INJECTOR 10A Injector
27 ECS * 15A Electronic control suspension
BLOWER 40A Blower motor
IGN 1 30A Ignition switch
ABS 2 30A Anti-lock brake system
ABS 1 30A Anti-lock brake system
IGN 2 30A Ignition switch
S/WARM 30A Seat warmer
H/LP (LO-LH) - Headlight relay (low beam-left)
FUEL PUMP - Fuel pump relay
HORN - Horn relay
START - Start motor relay
A/CON - Air conditioner relay
H/LP (HI) - Headlight relay (high beam)
FOG LP (FR) - Fog light relay (front)
TAIL LP - Taillight relay
WIPER - Wiper relay
BATT 60A Alternator, Battery
ALT 150A Alternator
COOLING 60A Cooling fan
* : if equipped
611
In case of an emergency
Driver-side knee bolster
Description Fuse rating Protected component
B/ALARM 10A Burglar alarm
A/BAG 15A Air bag
C/LIGHTER 20A Cigar lighter
S/WARMER 10A Seat warmer
P/WDW(RH) 20A Power window (right)
P/HANDLE 15A Power steering wheel
T/SIG LP 15A Turn signal light
HTD GLASS 30A Defroster
TRUNK OPEN 15A Trunk lid opener
CLUSTER 10A Cluster
A/BAG IND 10A Air bag indicator
P/OUTLET 25A Electrical power socket
LAN UNIT 10A Lan unit
CURTAIN(RR) 15A Electric curtain (rear)
FOG LP(RR), PIC 15A Fog light (rear), Personal identifi-
cation card
F/LID OPEN 15A Fuel filler lid opener
P/SEAT(RR) 30A Power seat (rear)
B/ALARM 10A Burglar alarm
STOP LP 15A Stop light
TRIP COMPUTER 10A Trip computer
B/UP LP 10A Back-up light
AV 10A Audio
H/LP 10A Headlight
91117-3F060
Driver-side knee bolster
In case of an emergency
126
Power connector
Your vehicle is equipped with a power connector to prevent bat-
tery discharge if your vehicle is parked without being operated
for prolonged periods. Use the following procedures before
parking the vehicle for prolonged period.
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver-side knee bolster cover and pull up the
“POWER/CONN”.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the power connector is pulled up from the fuse panel, the
warning chime, AV system, clock and intetrior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be reset after replace-
ment.
• Even though the power connector is pulled up, the battery
can still be discharged by operation of the headlights or
other electrical devices.
Description Fuse rating Protected component
A/CON 10A Air-conditioning system
P/WDW(LH) 20A Power window (left)
TAIL LP(RH) 10A Taillight (right)
BACK WARN’G 10A Back warning
DR LP 10A Door courtesy lamp
MIRROR HTD 15A Outside review mirror defroster
ENG SNSR 10A
Power train control system sensors
T/REDUCER 10A Seat belt tension reducer
CLOCK 10A Clock
WIPER(FR) 25A Wiper (front)
EPS 10A Electronic power steering
TAIL LP(LH) 10A Tail light (left)
ROOM LP 10A Room lamp
AV, CLOCK 15A Audio, Clock
LAN UNIT 10A Lan unit
TPMS 15A Tire pressure monitoring system
H/LP WASHER 20A Headlight washer
SHUNT CONN - Switch illumination
POWER/CONN - Power connector
1GHA403
Power
connector
613
In case of an emergency
TOWING
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an author-
ized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck
service. Proper lifting and towing proce-
dures are necessary to prevent damage
to the vehicle.The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to section 5 “Driving Tips”.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dol-
lies) and the front wheels off the ground.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
2GHA4107
2GHA4106
2GHA4108 2GHA4109
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
In case of an emergency
146
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Tie-down hook
(for flatbed towing)
Towing with a vehicle other than
a tow truck
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an Authorized Kia
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
OGH046012A
Tie-down hook
WARNING
Do not use the hooks under the
front of the vehicle for towing pur-
poses. These hooks are designed
ONLY for transport tie-down. If the
tie-down hooks are used for towing,
the tie-down hooks will be damaged
and this could lead to serious
injury.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
OGH046012
• Front
OGH046013
• Rear
615
In case of an emergency
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front or rear of the vehicle. Use
extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it
and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other con-
ditions from which the vehicle cannot
be driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequent-
ly.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the towing vehicle can hardly
move, do not forcibly continue
the towing.Contact an Authorized
Kia dealer or a commercial tow
truck service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
In case of an emergency
166
• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5
m) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
When your vehicle is being towed
by another vehicle other than a
tow truck (In case of an emer-
gency)
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Vehicle equipped with automatic
transaxles should not exceed 28 mph
(45 km/h) and should not be towed
more than 50 miles (80 km).
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle
The following methods are effective
when your vehicle is stuck in mud, sand
or similar substances that prevent the
vehicle from being driven out under its
own power.
• Remove the soil and sand, etc. from
the front and the back of the tires.
• Place a stone or wood under the tires.
1GHA4107
CAUTION
To prevent internal damage to the
transaxle, never tow your vehicle
from the rear (backwards) with all
four tires in contact with the sur-
face.
617
In case of an emergency
TIRES PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
➀
Low Tire Pressure Telltale
➁
TPMS Malfunction Indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is provided by a
separate telltale, which displays the
symbol "TPMS" when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
OGH049436N
➀
➁
In case of an emergency
186
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning telltale is illuminat-
ed, one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated.
Immediately reduce your speed,
avoid hard cornering and anticipate
increased stopping distances. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible when the tires are
cool. And inflate the tires to the prop-
er pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot
reach a service station or if the tire
cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tire with the
temporary spare tire.
Then the TPMS malfunction indicator
or the Low Tire Pressure telltale may
turn on after restarting and about 20
minutes of continuous driving before
you have the low-pressure tire
repaired and reinstalled on the vehi-
cle.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
significantly increases or
decreases, you should check
the tire inflation pressure and
adjust the tires to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure.
WARNING - Low tire pres-
sure
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
619
In case of an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator
turns on and stays on when there is
a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under-
inflation warning at the same time as
system failure then it will illuminate
both the TPMS malfunction and the
low tire pressure telltale e.g. if Front
Left sensor fails, the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator turns, but if Front Right,
Rear Left, or Rear Right tire is under-
inflated, the low tire pressure telltale
may turn on at the same time as the
TPMS malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized KIA dealer as soon as
possible to determine the cause of
the problem.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if the vehicle is
moving around electric power sup-
ply cable or radio transmitter such
as police stations, government and
public offices, broadcasting sta-
tions, military installations, air-
ports, or transmitting tower, etc.
this can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if snow chains
or some electronic devices, such as
notebook computers, are used in
the vehicle. This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If there is a failed tire sensor, it is
possible for the TPMS to tem-
porarily learn a replacement sen-
sor if closely driven to another
vehicle that is also equipped with
TPMS. In rare cases, this may
temporarily delay the TPMS mal-
function indicator from turning
on.
TPMS
In case of an emergency
206
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will turn on. Have
the flat tire repaired by an authorized
KIA dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.
NEVER use a puncture-repairing
agent to repair and/or inflate a low
pressure tire.If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
KIA dealer as soon as possible.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the TPMS
malfunction indicator or the Low Tire
Pressure telltale may illuminate after
restarting and driving about 20 min-
utes of continuous driving.
Once the low pressure tire is re-
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure and installed on the vehicle, the
TPMS malfunction indicator and the
low tire pressure telltale will extin-
guish.
If the low pressure and TPMS mal-
function indicators are not extin-
guished after about 20 minutes of
continuous driving, please visit an
authorized Kia dealer.
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6km) during that 3
hour period). Allow the tire to cool
before measuring the inflation pres-
sure.
Always be sure the tire is cold before
inflating to the recommended pres-
sure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6km) in that 3
hour period.
621
In case of an emergency
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules. Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator and slowly
move to a safe position off the
road.
WARNING
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
CAUTION
• Do not use any tire sealant if
your vehicle is equipped with
a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure sen-
sors.
• In order for the system to cor-
rectly monitor tires for under-
inflation, there should be a
total of exactly 4 sensors fit-
ted to each of the four driven
wheel positions. There should
be no other sensors in the
vehicle include spare tire
position since this could
cause the system to monitor
the wrong sensors.
In case of an emergency
226
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
The spare tire, jack, jack handle,
and wheel lug nut wrench are stored
in the trunk compartment. Move the
carpeting out of the way to reach this
equipment.
The jack assembly is located in the
trunk, under the carpeting, on the
spare tire.
Removing the spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Important - use of compact spare
tire (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
OGH046010N 1GHA407
CAUTION
- Compact spare
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
623
In case of an emergency
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards.Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1
inch (25 mm), which could result in
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take the vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact
spare.
• Do not use tire chains on this tire.
Because of the smaller size, a tire
chain will not fit properly.This could
damage the vehicle and result in
loss of the chain.
• This tire should not be installed on
the front axle if the vehicle must be
driven in snow or on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
WARNING - Compact spare
This spare tire should be used
only for VERY short distances.
Compact spares should NEVER
be used for long drives or
extended distances.
In case of an emergency
246
Changing tires
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
Tire replacement
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park).
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground
whenever possible. If you can-
not find a firm, level place off
the road, call a towing service
company for assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle;never use
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jack support.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death. No person
should place any portion of
their body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack ;
use vehicle support stands.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
1JBA6021
625
In case of an emergency
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6.Wrap a piece of cloth around the
tip of the screwdriver to avoid
scratching.
7. Insert a screwdriver into the notch
of the wheel cover and pry gently
to remove the wheel cover (if
equipped).
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,and
always block the wheel diago-
nally opposite the wheel being
changed.
• It is recommended that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
should remain in a vehicle that
is being jacked.
1JBA6504 2GHN409
627
In case of an emergency
13. Once the wheel lug nuts have
been tightened, lower the vehicle
fully to the ground and continue to
tighten the lug nuts until they are
fully secured. Tighten the wheel
lug nuts firmly in a “star” pattern.
If you are unsure of the tightness
of the wheel lug nuts, have them
checked at the nearest service
station. The specified tightening
torque is 65-79 lb•ft (9~11 kg•m,
88-107 N•m). Improperly tight-
ened wheel lug nuts could cause
brake pedal vibration while brak-
ing.
14. Reinstall the wheel cover by fit-
ting the boss of the wheel cover
in the groove of the wheel.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut, wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
2GHN409A
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts
removed are reinstalled - or, if
replaced, that nuts with metric
threads and the same chamfer
configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a colli-
sion.
WARNING
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to Section 8, Specifications.
7
Maintenance services / 7-2
Normal maintenance schedule / 7-3
Severe maintenance schedule / 7-6
Owner maintenance / 7-9
Engine compartment / 7-12
Engine oil and oil filter / 7-13
Engine cooling system / 7-14
Brakes / 7-16
Power steering / 7-17
Automatic transaxle / 7-18
Lubricants and fluids / 7-20
Air cleaner / 7-21
Climate control air filter / 7-22
Wiper blades / 7-24
Battery / 7-26
Tires and wheels / 7-29
Bulb replacement / 7-41
Lubricant specifications / 7-46
Exterior care / 7-48
Interior care / 7-51
California perchlorate notice / 7-52
Maintenance
Maintenance
27
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehi-
cle, we strongly recommend that you
have an Authorized Kia Dealer perform
this work.
An Authorized Kia Dealer has factory-
trained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle properly.For
expert advice and quality service, see an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages.You need
this information to establish your compli-
ance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your Kia warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Warranty & Consumer
Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an
Authorized Kia Dealer. An Authorized Kia
Dealer meets Kia`s high service quality
standards and receives technical support
from Kia in order to provide you with a
high level of service satisfaction.
Scheduled maintenance service
If none of the following conditions are
applicable, then use Schedule 1 –
Normal Maintenance.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 90°F
(32°C)
If any of the preceding conditions apply,
follow Schedule 2 – Severe Maintenance.
After 105 months or 105,000 miles
(168,000 km) continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
73
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
SCHEDULE 1 - NORMAL MAINTENANCE
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84
Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105
(km x 1,000)
(12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144) (156) (168)
Drive belts (1) I I I
Engine oil and engine oil filter
Auto transaxle fluid I I I I I I R
Air cleaner element I I I R I I I R I I I R I I
Spark plugs
Valve clearance (2) I
Engine coolant (3) (4)
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
(1) The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
(2) Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the
operation.
(3) Coolant level adjustment and leak : Inspect regularly.
(4) When adding coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the
factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
At first, replace at 60,000 miles or 60 months ;
after that, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months
Replace every 100,000 miles or 10 years
Replace every 7,500 miles or 12 months
Maintenance
47
SCHEDULE 1 - NORMAL MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84
Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105
(km x 1,000)
(12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144) (156) (168)
Fuel filter R R
Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Vaccum and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Fuel tank air filter I R I R I R I
Battery condition I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I
Brake pedal Inspect frequently depending on the condition
Parking brake I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake fluid I I I I I I I
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
75
Maintenance
SCHEDULE 1 - NORMAL MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84
Miles x 1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105
(km x 1,000)
(12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144) (156) (168)
Power steering fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation, linkage and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints L L L
Drive shaft and boots Inspect every 12 months or 15,000 miles
Tire Please refer to section “Tires and wheels” on Chapter 7
IIIIII IIIIIIII
Chassis/body nuts and bolts I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
Air conditioner refrigerant Inspect refrigerant amount annually
Air conditioner compressor Inspect operation annually
Climate control air filter Replace every 10,000 miles
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
L: Lubricate
Pressure
Tread wear
Maintenance
67
SCHEDULE 2 - SEVERE MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42
Miles x 1,000 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42
(km x 1,000)
(5) (10) (15) (20) (25) (30) (35) (40) (45) (50) (55) (60) (65) (70)
Drive belts (1) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Auto transaxle fluid I R
Air cleaner element Inspect more frequently depending on the condition and if necessary, replace
Spark plugs Inspect more frequently depending on the condition and if necessary, replace
Valve clearance (2) Inspect every 60,000 miles or 48 months
Engine coolant (3) (4)
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
(1) The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
(2) Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the
operation.
(3) Coolant level adjustment and leak : Inspect regularly.
(4) When adding coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the
factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
At first, replace at 60,000 miles or 60 months ;
after that, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months
77
Maintenance
SCHEDULE 2 - SEVERE MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42
Miles x 1,000 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42
(km x 1,000)
(5) (10) (15) (20) (25) (30) (35) (40) (45) (50) (55) (60) (65) (70)
Fuel filter Replace every 37,500 miles
Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Vaccum and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Fuel tank air filter I R I R
Battery condition I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake pedal Inspect frequently depending on the condition
Parking brake I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
Maintenance
87
SCHEDULE 2 - SEVERE MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Number of Months or Miles (kilometers), whichever comes first
Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42
Miles x 1,000 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42
(km x 1,000)
(5) (10) (15) (20) (25) (30) (35) (40) (45) (50) (55) (60) (65) (70)
Power steering fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation, linkage and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints L L L
Drive shaft and boots Inspect every 6 months or 7,500 miles
Tire Please refer to section “Tires and wheels” on Chapter 7
IIIIII IIIIIIII
Chassis/body nuts and bolts I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
Air conditioner refrigerant Inspect refrigerant amount annually
Air conditioner compressor Inspect operation annually
Climate control air filter Replace every 10,000 miles
I: Inspect and, if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R: Replace or change.
Pressure
Tread wear
79
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Owner maintenance schedule
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or qualified service technician
at the frequencies indicated to help
ensure safe, dependable operation of
your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
qualified service technician or service
advisor as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
eling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
strange sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air condition-
ing system after use is normal).
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause serious
injury.
Maintenance
107
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the coolant
recovery reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or da-mage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system
before the warm weather season.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
711
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, sev-
eral procedures can be done only by a
qualified service technician with special
tools.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warran-
ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-
rate Kia Warranty & Consumer
Information Manual provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-
icing or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while per-
forming some maintenance pro-
cedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by a quali-
fied technician.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while work-
ing under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose cloth-
ing before getting near the engine
or cooling fans.
Maintenance
127
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OGH057001N
1.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Auto transaxle oil dipstick
5. Air cleaner
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Engine oil dipstick
8. Radiator cap
9. Positive battery terminal
10. Engine coolant reservoir
11. Negative battery terminal
713
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3.Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level.The level should be between
F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended Lubricants” later in
this section.)
Changing the engine oil and filter
Change engine oil and filter according to
the Scheduled Maintenance at the begin-
ning of this section.
OGH057003
OGH057005
Maintenance
147
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the level
gauge attached to the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent
additions are required, see an Authorized
Kia Dealer for a cooling system inspec-
tion.
WARNING
- Removing
radiator cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap while the engine is oper-
ating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in seri-
ous personal injury from escap-
ing hot coolant or steam.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Even then, use
extreme care when removing the
radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel
around it, and turn it counter-
clockwise slowly to the first stop.
Step back while the pressure is
released from the cooling system.
When you are sure all the pres-
sure has been released, press
down on the cap, using a thick
towel, and continue turning coun-
terclockwise to remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
OGH077003N
715
Maintenance
Engine coolant
• Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in
the coolant mixture.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be pro-
tected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Coolant
Solution
Water
1GHA412
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam
may blow out under pressure. This
could cause serious injury.
Maintenance
167
BRAKES
Checking brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage.This is a normal condition asso-
ciated with the wear of the brake pads. If
the fluid level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an Authorized
Kia Dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended Lubricants” later in
this section.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
WARNING
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an Authorized Kia Dealer.
OGH057013
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to contact
the vehicle's body paint, as paint
damage will result. Brake fluid,
which has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should never
be used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be thrown
out. Don't put in the wrong kind of
fluid. For example, just a few drops
of mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in your brake system can
damage brake system parts.
717
Maintenance
POWER STEERING
Checking the power steering fluid
level
With the vehicle on level ground, check
the fluid level in the power steering reser-
voir periodically. The fluid should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
level gauge attached to the cap.
Before adding power steering fluid, thor-
oughly clean the area around the reser-
voir cap to prevent power steering fluid
contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level.
In the event the power steering system
requires frequent addition of fluid, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To avoid damage to the power steer-
ing pump, do not operate the vehicle
for prolonged periods with a low
power steering fluid level.
• Never start the engine when the reser-
voir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful that
dirt does not get into the tank.
• Too little fluid can make the steering
wheel heavier or strange noise can be
generated.
• The use of the non-specified fluid
could reduce the effectiveness of the
power steering wheel and cause dam-
age to it.
Use only the specified power steering
fluid. (Refer to "Recommended
Lubricants" later in this section.)
Power steering hose
Check the connections for oil leaks,
severe damage and the twists in the
power steering hose before driving.
OGH076421N
Maintenance
187
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Checking the automatic transaxle
fluid level
The automatic transaxle fluid level
should be checked regularly.
Keep the vehicle on the level ground with
the parking brake applied and check the
fluid level according to the following pro-
cedure.
1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)
position and confirm the engine is run-
ning at normal idle speed.
2. After the transaxle is warmed up suffi-
ciently (fluid temperature 158~176°F
(70~80°C)), for example by 10 minutes
usual driving, shift the selector lever
through all positions then place the
selector lever in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
position.
3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”
range on the level gauge. If the fluid
level is lower, add the specified fluid
from the fill hole. If the fluid level is
higher, drain the fluid from the drain
hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold con-
dition (fluid temperature 68~86°F
(20~30°C) add the fluid to “COLD” line
and then recheck the fluid level
according to the above step 2.
OGH057008
OVQ056002
COLD
HOT
WARNING - Transaxle fluid
The transaxle fluid level should be
checked when the engine is at nor-
mal operating temperature. This
means that the engine, radiator,
radiator hose and exhaust system
etc., are very hot. Exercise great
care not to burn yourself during this
procedure.
WARNING - Parking brake
To avoid sudden movement of the
vehicle, apply parking brake and
depress the brake pedal before
moving the shift lever.
CAUTION
• Low fluid level causes transaxle
slippage. Overfilling can cause
foaming, loss of fluid and
transaxle malfunction.
• The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunc-
tion and failure.
719
Maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE
“COLD” scale is for reference only and
should NOT be used to determine
transaxle fluid level.
New automatic transaxle fluid should
be red. The red dye is added so the
assembly plant can identify it as auto-
matic transaxle fluid and distinguish it
from engine oil or antifreeze. The red
dye, which is not an indicator of fluid
quality, is not permanent. As the vehi-
cle is driven, the automatic transaxle
fluid will begin to look darker. The
color may eventually appear light
brown.
✽✽
NOTICE
Have an Authorized Kia dealer inspect
or change the automatic transaxle fluid
according to the Scheduled
Maintenance at the beginning of this
section.
Maintenance
207
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary.Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Body lubrication
All moving points of the body, such as
door hinges, hood hinges, and locks,
should be lubricated each time the
engine oil is changed. Use a non-freez-
ing lubricant on locks during cold weath-
er.
Make sure the engine hood secondary
latch keeps the hood from opening when
the primary latch is released.
OGH057500
WARNING
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or it's occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
721
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Element replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should be inspected according to the
maintenance schedule.
1.Remove the engine compartment
shroud on the air cleaner.
2. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
3.Wipe the inside of the air cleaner
housing with a clean, damp cloth.
4. Replace the air cleaner element. We
recommend that the air cleaner ele-
ment be replaced with genuine Kia
parts.
5. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
OGH057009 OGH057010 OGH056011N
Maintenance
227
Replace the element according to the
Scheduled Maintenance Section.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual recom-
mended intervals. (Refer to Severe
Maintenance Schedule in this section.)
The climate control air filter located
between the evaporator core and blower
filters the air coming into the vehicle.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter for a period of time, the air flow
from the air vents may be decreased and
the dust intake may increase. Therefore
the air filter should be replaced at the
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule. If the vehicle is operated in
dusty or sandy areas, replace the filter
more often than the recommended inter-
vals.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box part way, reach
inside and pull out the elastic line and
push the retaining clip through the hole
in the rear of the glove box. Allow the
glove box to open.
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• Driving without an air cleaner
encourages backfiring, which
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.
• When removing the air cleaner
element, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air intake,
or damage may result.
1GHA416
OGH056911N
Evaporator core
Blower
Outside air
Recirculated air
Climate control air filter
Inside
vehicle
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
723
Maintenance
2.With the glove box open, grasp both
sides of the glove box, push inward on
the stoppers and pull them over the
trim panel to allow the glove box hang
freely on the hinges.
3. Pull the hooks under the climate con-
trol air filter cover upwards and remove
the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽✽
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it according to the “UP”
and “DOWN” identification marks.
Otherwise, the system may produce
noise and the effectiveness of the filter
may be reduced.
1GHA418
UP
UP
UP
UP
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
2GHA419
1GHA417
Maintenance
247
WIPER BLADES
Wiper blade maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
shield wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Windshield wiper blade replace-
ment
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
✽✽
NOTICE
The use of a non-specified wiper blade
could result in wiper malfunction and
failure.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
725
Maintenance
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may chip
or crack the windshield.
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4.Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
1LDA5023
Maintenance
267
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to charge the bat-
tery when the battery cables are
connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
BATTERY
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, which is a highly
combustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If
possible, continue to apply
water with a sponge or
cloth until medical attention
is received.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensation,
get medical attention imme-
diately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
(Continued)
PROPOSITION 65 WARN-
ING
Battery posts, terminals, and relat-
ed accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known
to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other chemi-
cals known to the State of California
to cause cancer. Wash hands after
handling.
727
Maintenance
For best battery service :
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
Items to be reset after the battery has
been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Driver seat position memory system
(See Chapter 3)
• Power window (See Chapter 3)
• Clock (See Chapter 3)
• Climate control system
(See Chapter 4)
• Audio (See Chapter 3)
• Sunroof (See Chapter 3)
CBGQ0705
Maintenance
287
✽✽
NOTICE
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last when
the battery is disconnected.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1.Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
729
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked every day
when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”
means the vehicle has not been driv-
en for at least three hours or driven
less than one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
3GHA523
XXX XX XX
XXX XX
XXX XX
XXX XX
XXX XX XX
XXX XX XX
X
X
X
X
X
X
390
390
860
860
390
390
860
860
OGH036905N
WARNING
- Tire underin-
flation
Severe underinflation (10 psi (70
kPa) or more) can lead to severe
heat build-up, causing blowouts,
tread separation and other tire
failures that can result in the
loss of vehicle control leading to
severe injury or death. This risk
is much higher on hot days and
when driving for protracted peri-
ods at high speeds.
WARNING
Speedometer and Odometer is
calculated according to the tire
size.Therefore, if you do not use
the tire recommended for the
vehicle, the calculation of the
Speedometer and Odometer may
be incorrect.
Maintenance
307
✽✽
NOTICE
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater pos-
sibility of damage from road haz-
ards.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Warm tires normally exceed rec-
ommended cold tire pressures by 4
to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire infla-
tion valve caps. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leak-
age. If a valve cap is missing,
install a new one as soon as possi-
ble.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure.You can not tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and lead
to sudden tire failure.This could
result in loss of vehicle control
and potential injury.
WARNING - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than one mile (1.6
km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
731
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem.Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement.If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the cen-
ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tire
pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure
to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems. They help prevent leaks
by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage.Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to Section 8, Specifications.
CBGQ0706
CBGQ0707
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
With a full-size spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
Maintenance
327
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only
from front to rear and not from
right to left.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread.This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
Wheel alignment and tire
balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper wheel weights can dam-
age your vehicle's aluminum wheels.
Use only approved wheel weights.
2GHA5032
Tread wear indicator
WARNING
• Do not use the temporary
spare tire for tire rotation
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
733
Maintenance
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
WARNING - Replacing tires
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will reduce
braking effectiveness, steering
accuracy, and traction.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capabil-
ity. Do not use a size and type
of tire and wheel that is differ-
ent from the one that is origi-
nally installed on your vehicle.
It can affect the safety and per-
formance of your vehicle,
which could lead to handling
failure or rollover and serious
injury. When replacing the
tires, be sure to equip all four
tires with the tire and wheel of
the same size, type, tread,
brand and load-carrying
capacity. If you nevertheless
decide to equip your vehicle
with any tire/wheel combina-
tion not recommended by Kia
for off road driving, you should
not use these tires for highway
driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that is
not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Antilock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) (If equipped) to work
irregularly.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer calibration, head-
light aim and bumper height.
Maintenance
347
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignement.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possiblity of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire sidewall labeling
Federal law requires tire manufactur-
ers to place standardized information
on the sidewall of all tires.This infor-
mation identifies and describes the
fundamental characteristics of the
tire and also provides the tire identifi-
cation number (TIN) for safety stan-
dard certification. The TIN can be
used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2.Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P185/65R14 86H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
cars or light trucks; however, not
all tires have this marking).
185 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
14 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
735
Maintenance
86 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one.The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
5.5JX14
5.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
14 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger cars. The speed
rating is part of the tire size designa-
tion on the sidewall of the tire. This
symbol corresponds to that tire's
designed maximum safe operating
speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years, based
on the manufacturing date, tire
strength and performance, decline
with age naturally (even unused
spare tires). Therefore, the tires
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1606 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2006.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maintenance
367
4.Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire.Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
The following information relates to
the tire grading system developed by
the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) for grading
tires by tread wear, traction and tem-
perature performance.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. However, performance
may differ from the norm because of
variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on Kia vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
WARNING
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to a
loss of control and an accident
involving serious injury or
death.
737
Maintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. The
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C.The grades repre-
sent the tire’s resistance to the gen-
eration of heat and its ability to dissi-
pate heat when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tires to
degenerate and reduce tires life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tires failure. Grade C corre-
sponds to a level of performance
which all passenger vehicle tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A
and B represent higher levels of per-
formance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by the law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmis-
sion, power seats, and air condition-
ing.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
Maintenance
387
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight:This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa):The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight:The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
739
Maintenance
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs.(68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire:Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
That load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard:A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
if you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions. Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Maintenance
407
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the drive wheels (front
wheel).
Be sure that the chains are installed
in accordance with the manufactur-
er's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you hear noise caused by chains
contacting the body, retighten the
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retight-
en the chains after driving 0.3 ~
0.6 miles (0.5 ~ 1.0 km).
WARNING - Snow or ice
• When driving on roads cov-
ered with snow or ice, drive at
less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE “S” class or wire
chains.
• Do not use tire chains on vehi-
cles equipped with aluminum
wheels. In unavoidable cir-
cumstance, use a wire type
chain.
• Use wire chains less than
15mm to prevent damage to
the chain’s connection.
741
Maintenance
BULB REPLACEMENT
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
Headlight bulb replacement
✽✽
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked
by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake and ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position to avoid sud-
den movement of the vehicle and
burning your fingers or receiving an
electric shock.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an Authorized Kia Dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be
removed before you can get the
bulb. Especially if you must remove
the front bumper to replace the light
bulbs in the front of the vehicle.
This may result in damage to the
vehicle.
OGH056016
➀ Headlight (High)
➁ Headlight (Low)
➂ Front fog light
➃ Position light
➄ Front turn signal light
➅ Side mark light
WARNING - Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
(Continued)
G270A03ON
Maintenance
427
1. Open the hood.
2.Remove the engine compartment
shroud.
3. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlight bulb assem-
bly by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Install a new headlight bulb assembly.
6. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-
ing it clockwise.
Headlight (HID type), position and
front fog light, turn signal light
and side mark light bulb replace-
ment
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
Dealer.
* HID : High Intensity Discharge
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OMG075038N
WARNING - HID Headlight
low beam (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or inspect
the low beam (XENON bulb) due to
electric shock danger. If the low
beam (XENON bulb) is not working,
have your vehicle checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
743
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
2GHA424
OFF
DOOR
ON
2GHA746
1GHA561
1GHA431
1GHA432
Front map lamp
Center dome lamp
Vanity mirror lamp
Trunk room lamp
Glove box lamp
WARNING - HID Headlight
low beam (if equipped)
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-
ton is depressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
Maintenance
447
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws with
a cross-tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
Door courtesy and foot lamp bulb
replacement
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
Dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
1. Open the trunk lid.
1GHA433
1GHA511A
1GHA427/1GHA428
Door courtesy lamp
Foot lamp
➀ Rear turn signal light
➁ Stop and tail light
➂ Back-up light
➃
Side marker
OGH056017
745
Maintenance
2. Remove the service cover by turning
the plastic screw counterclockwise
and removing the cover.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it until the
tabs on the bulb align with the slots in
the socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
7. Replace the service cover and tighten
the screw.
High mounted stop light bulb
replacement
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
Dealer.
OGH056020
OGH056019
OGH056018
➀ High mounted stop light
OGH056021
Maintenance
467
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Recommended lubricants
To help achieve proper engine and pow-
ertrain performance and durability, use
only lubricants of the proper quality. The
correct lubricants also help promote
engine efficiency that results in improved
fuel economy.
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving
Oil are now available. Along with other
additional benefits, they contribute to fuel
economy by reducing the amount of fuel
necessary to overcome engine friction.
Often, these improvements are difficult to
measure in everyday driving, but in a
year’s time, they can offer significant cost
and energy savings.
*¹ Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Classification
Engine oil
*¹
API Service SL or above, ILSAC GF-3 or above
Automatic transaxle fluid
DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III or other
brands meeting the SP-III specification approved by
Kia Motors Corp.
Power steering fluid PSF-IV
Brake fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
747
Maintenance
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (starting and oil flow). Lower
viscosity engine oils can provide better
fuel economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity engine
oils are required for satisfactory lubrica-
tion in hot weather. Using oils of any vis-
cosity other than those recommended
could result in engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operat-
ed in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity
from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-
20,5W-30 (API SL / ILSAC GF-3). However, the engine oil is not available in your country,
select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant.This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Maintenance
487
EXTERIOR CARE
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do not
wash the vehicle in direct sunlight
or when the body of the vehicle is
warm.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
come in contact with electrical/
electronic components inside the
vehicle as this may damage them.
OJB037800
749
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with
a dry cloth will scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive clean-
ers, or strong detergents containing
highly alkaline or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized aluminum
parts. This may result in damage to
the protective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deterioration.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repairor replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Maintenance
507
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads.This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any acid detergent. It may
damage and corrode the aluminum
wheels coated with a clear protective
finish.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
751
Maintenance
INTERIOR CARE
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as per-
fume and cosmetic oil from contacting
the dashboard because they may cause
damage or discoloration. If they do con-
tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-
diately.See the instructions that follow for
the proper way to clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not scrape or scratch the inside of
the rear window. This may result in
damage to the rear window defroster
grid.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
Maintenance
527
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
ardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as
airbag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners
and keyless remote entry batteries, must
be disposed of according to Title 22
California Code of Regulations Section
67384.10 (a).
8
Specifications / 8-2
Specifications
Specifications
28
Dimensions Light Bulbs
1)
HID(High Intensity Discharge) type
2)
Sunroof type
Item in (mm)
Overall length 196.9 (5,000)
Overall width 72.8 (1,850)
Overall height 58.5 (1,485)
Front tread 62.4 (1,585)
Rear tread 62.6 (1,590)
Wheelbase 110.2 (2,800)
SPECIFICATIONS
The specifications given here are for general information only. Although this information was accurate at the time of printing, Kia
reserves the right to change its vehicles or their specifications without notice. Please check with an authorized Kia dealer for more
precise and more up-to-date information.
Light Bulb Wattage
Headlight (High) 55
Headlight (Low) 55 or 35
1)
Front turn signal lights (LED type) 14.5
Position lights 5
Side mark lights 5
Front fog lights (if equipped) 55
Stop and tail lights 27/8
Rear turn signal lights 28
Back-up lights 18
High mounted stop light (LED type) 2.5
License plate lights 5
Front map lamp 8 or 10
2)
Center dome lamp 10
Door courtesy lamps 5
Vanity mirror lamps 1.5
Trunk room lamp 5
Foot lamp 5
Glove box lamp 5
83
Specifications
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1
5.49 US qt. (5.2 l)
API Service SL or above,
(with filter change) ILSAC GF-3 or above
Transaxle fluid 11.5 US qt. (10.9 l)
Power steering 1.1 US qt. (1.0 l) PSF-IV
Coolant 9.2 US qt. (8.7 l) Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator
Brake fluid 0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel 18.5 US gal (70 l) Unleaded gasoline with AKI 87 or higher
*¹Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the page 7-47.
DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III or other
brands meeting the SP-III specification approved by
Kia Motors Corp.
Tires
Item
Recommended Cold Tire
Wheel lug nut torque
Tire Wheel
Inflation Pressure
psi (kPa)
lb·ft (kg·m, N·m)
Full size tire
P235/55 R 17 6.5J×17 30 (210) 65~79 (9~11, 88~107)
P225/60 R 16 6.5J×16 30 (210) 65~79 (9~11, 88~107)
Compact spare tire
T125/80D16 60 (420) 65~79 (9~11, 88~107)
Capacities
9
Toll free assistance / 9-2
Emergency roadside assistance / 9-2
Trip interruption / 9-3
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country / 9-3
Electrical equipment / 9-4
Reporting safety defects / 9-5
Purchasing factory authorized manuals / 9-6
Consumer assistance, Reporting safety defects
Consumer assistance, Reporting safety defects
29
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)
Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current model year
Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is delivered to the first
retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-service date), whichev-
er is earlier, for a period of 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichev-
er is earlier, subject to the terms, conditions and exclusions set
forth in the Kia Warranty and Consumer Information Guide
applicable to your model year vehicle.
KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other bene-
fits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment, the claims
and/or service requests are excessive in frequency or type of
occurrence.
Toll Free Consumer Assistance
Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed from 5:00
AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday and is accessible
by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).
For more information regarding assistance available, please
refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer Information Manual.
Emergency Roadside Assistance
Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-
4Kia (4542).
Please note that you must provide your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time of your call. The
VIN can be found on the dash of your vehicle on the driver’s
side, on the door jamb of the driver’s door, your vehicle’s regis-
tration or proof of insurance card.
Kia utilizes a network of over 17,000 roadside assistance
providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require a bat-
tery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia Roadside
Assistance Representative will dispatch someone to deliver a
small quantity of gas, change a flat tire with your inflated spare,
or arrange a battery jump to allow you to proceed to your des-
tination.We have access to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths
to help you should you become locked out of your Kia, also at
no charge.
In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehicle
undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s Roadside
Assistance Representative will arrange to transport your vehicle
to the nearest Kia dealer or to an alternative service location.
Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport vehi-
cle, as determined by our driver, to receive this service. In the
event that Kia does not have a dealer or an alternative service
location available in a particular location, Kia will work with a
reputable local service facility to ensure that you receive prompt
service.Warranty repairs are performed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any Kia
vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “salvage” title
or similar “branded” title under any state’s law or has been
declared a “total loss” or equivalent by a financial institution
or insurance company.
93
Consumer assistance, Reporting safety defects
Trip Interruption
Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the event that
a warranty-related disablement occurs more than 150 miles
from your home, and the repairs require more than 24 hours to
complete. Reasonable reimbursement is included for meals,
lodging, or rental car expenses.Trip interruption coverage is lim-
ited to $100 per day subject to a three day maximum limit per
incident.You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center
to obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia Roadside
Assistance Center gives authorization for trip interruption bene-
fits, they will assist you in making the necessary arrangements.
Insurance deductibles, expenses, and claims paid by your
insurance company or other providers are not eligible for reim-
bursement.
Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under Kia’s
Trip Interruption Policy.
Registering Your Vehicle in a Foreign Country
If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country, you
should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in that coun-
try. Even if you successfully register the vehicle in a foreign
country, you may experience the following problems and should
therefore consider the possibility of having to deal with them:
1.The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.If other
than the specified fuel is used, it could cause damage to the
engine, the fuel injection system, and other fuel-related parts
which may not be covered under your New Vehicle Emissions
Limited Warranty.
2.We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave the
country in which you purchased your Kia as a new and reg-
ister it in another country, problems arising from the use of
fuel other than the specified fuel are not subject to manufac-
turer’s warranty. Because vehicles like yours may not be mar-
keted in the new country of registration, parts, servicing tech-
niques and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehi-
cle may be unavailable.
Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical speci-
fications required by the government may vary enough from
the country of purchase to cause additional problems.
3.There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area in
which you plan to register your vehicle.You may additionally
experience difficulty in obtaining services in a foreign country
for any number of reasons.
Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for problems that
result from unsatisfactory service or lack of service outside of
the United States.
Consumer assistance, Reporting safety defects
49
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)
The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to perform
under all reasonably expected operating conditions. However,
before any additional electrical equipment is installed in your
vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer, in order to ensure
that you do not void your warranty.
Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is installed,
may adversely affect the operation of your vehicle, including
such systems as the engine control system, the audio system
and the electrical charging system and thus potentially void all
or part of your warranty.
We assume no responsibility for any expense you may incur or
for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its components or
systems that may result from the installation of additional elec-
trical equipment that is not supplied, or recommended for instal-
lation by, Kia.
Installation of a Mobile Two-Way Radio System
If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly, or if an
excessively powerful type of system is used, other electronic
systems may be adversely affected. To avoid damage to your
vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer concerning the prop-
er equipment and installation.
95
Consumer assistance, Reporting safety defects
Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or
exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and fol-
low all directions in this Owner's Manual, particularly the infor-
mation under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and
"WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding
the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and defects please
contact Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line as below:
National Consumer Affairs Manager
Kia Motors America, Inc.
P.O. Box 52410
Irvine, CA 92619-2410
1-800-333-4Kia (4542)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia
Motors America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors
America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safer-
car.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
Consumer assistance, Reporting safety defects
69
PURCHASING FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS (U.S. ONLY)
The following publications can be ordered by calling the toll-free
phone number 1-866-542-6268. Publications for the previous
years may also be obtained by calling the same number.
Valid only for sales within the U.S.. Canadian owners should
contact their Authorized Kia Dealer.
Service manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended proce-
dures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple enough for most
mechanically-inclined owners to understand.
Electrical troubleshooting manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by providing in-
depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in
your vehicle.
Owner’s manual:
This manual describes the overall features and operating pro-
cedures for the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-866-542-6268
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. - 6:00 P.M. EST
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Publication
Part Number
Form Description
2009 Kia Amanti
Service Repair Manual
2009 Kia Amanti
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2009 Kia Amanti
Owner’s Manual
UH090 PS 010
UH090 PS 011
UH090 PS 013
Index
10
Index
2
10
Air Bags - Advanced Supplemental Restraint System··3-52
Air Bag
Curtain·········································································3-65
Driver's ········································································3-57
Front Passenger's·························································3-58
Side··············································································3-64
Warning Light ····················································3-73, 4-35
Air Cleaner·····································································7-21
Air Conditioning
Button ··········································································4-53
System Operation Tips ················································4-54
Air Intake Control Button··············································4-49
Alignment, Tire Balance and Wheel ·····························7-32
Aluminum Wheel Maintenance·····································7-50
Antenna ·········································································3-98
Anti-Lock Brake System···············································4-15
Warning Light······························································4-31
Anti-Theft Steering Column Lock,
Ignition Switch and ·······················································4-2
Ashtray···········································································3-91
Audio
Remote Control ···························································3-99
Systems······································································3-100
Automatic
Climate Control System ··············································4-46
Transaxle······························································4-5, 7-18
Transaxle Fluid Level, Checking the ··························7-18
Balance, Wheel Alignment and Tire······························7-32
Battery············································································7-26
Recharging···································································7-27
Service, For Best ·························································7-27
Before Driving·································································5-5
Belts,
Safety···········································································3-30
Pre-tensioner, seat························································3-30
Blade Replacement, Windshield Wiper·························7-24
Blades, Wiper·································································7-24
Body Lubrication···························································7-20
Brake
Fluid Level, Checking·················································7-16
Parking·········································································4-13
System ·········································································4-10
System, Anti-Lock·······················································4-15
Wear Indicators, Disc ··················································4-11
Brakes ············································································7-16
Power···········································································4-10
Trailer ··········································································5-21
Break-In Process, Vehicle················································1-3
Bulb Replacement··························································7-41
Bulbs, Light ·····································································8-2
A
B
10
3
Index
California Perchlorate Notice······································· 7-52
Capacities·········································································8-3
Care
of the Safety Belt System, Proper Use and·················3-40
Exterior········································································7-48
Interior·········································································7-51
Catalytic Converters, Operating Precautions for·············5-4
Chain
Installation ···································································5-11
Safety···········································································5-21
Tire···············································································5-10
Charging System Warning·············································4-32
Child
Restraint System··························································3-43
Safety Lock, Rear Door···············································3-12
Children
Restraint of Infants and Small·····································3-41
Restraint of Larger·······················································3-42
Cigarette Lighter····························································3-91
Cleaner, Air····································································7-21
Cleaning
Interior Window Glass·················································7-51
Lap/Shoulder Belt Webbing········································7-51
Upholstery and Interior Trim·······································7-51
Climate Control System, Automatic······························4-46
Air Filter······································································7-22
Clock··············································································3-95
Cluster, Instrument·························································4-25
Compartment, Engine·············································2-4, 7-12
Consumer Assistance·······················································9-2
Coolant Level, Checking the·········································7-14
Cooling System, Engine················································7-14
Cruise Control System···················································4-19
Cup Holder·····································································3-92
Day/Night Rearview Mirror ··········································3-86
Defroster ········································································4-44
Rear Window·······························································4-44
Dimensions ······································································8-2
Disc Brake Wear Indicators···········································4-11
Dome Light····································································3-88
Door
Child Safety Lock, Rear··············································3-12
Courtesy Lamp ····························································3-88
Locks ·············································································3-9
Open Display·······························································4-34
Driver Position Memory System···································3-28
Driving
at Night··········································································5-8
Conditions, Special························································5-7
Conditions, Hazardous ··················································5-7
in Flooded Areas··························································5-12
in the Rain ·····································································5-8
Tips················································································5-1
C
D
Index
4
10
your Vehicle···································································4-1
Winter ············································································5-9
with a Trailer ·······························································5-21
Economical Operation, Suggestions for··························5-6
Electrical
Circuit Protection ··························································6-6
Equipment······································································9-4
Electronic Stability Control···········································4-22
Emergency
In Case of an··································································6-1
Roadside Assistance ······················································9-2
Starting···········································································6-4
Emission Control System ················································5-3
Engine
Compartment························································2-4, 7-12
Cooling System ···························································7-14
Exhaust Gas Precautions···············································5-3
Oil and Oil Filter·························································7-13
Oil Level, Checking the ··············································7-13
Oil Pressure Warning···················································4-32
Starting the·····································································4-4
Exhaust Gas Precautions, Engine····································5-3
Exterior Care··································································7-48
Fan Speed Control Knob···············································4-49
Filler Lid, Fuel·······························································3-81
Finish
Damage Repair····························································7-49
Maintenance ································································7-48
Flasher, Hazard Warning ···············································4-45
Flat Tire, If You Have a·················································6-22
Flooded Areas, Driving in ·············································5-12
Fluids, Lubricants and ···················································7-20
Fuel
Filler Lid······································································3-81
Gauge···········································································4-27
Level Warning, Low····················································4-34
Requirements·································································5-2
Fuse/Relay Panel Description··········································6-9
Fuses ················································································6-7
Driver-side Knee Bolster·············································6-11
Engine Compartment···················································6-10
Replacement ··································································6-7
Gasoline
Engine (undleaded)························································5-2
Containing Alcohol and Methanol ································5-2
E
F
G
10
5
Index
Glove Box······································································3-90
Hazard Warning Flasher·········································4-45, 6-2
Hazardous Driving conditions·········································5-7
Headlight
High Beam Indicator···················································4-34
Bulb Replacement ·······················································7-41
Headrest Adjustment············································3-24, 3-26
Hitches···········································································5-20
Homelink Wireless Control System ······························5-27
Hood···············································································3-80
Horn···············································································4-18
How To Use This Manual················································1-2
If You Have a Flat Tire··················································6-22
Ignition Switch·································································4-2
and Anti-Theft Steering Column Lock··························4-2
Illumination, Instrument Panel······································4-27
Immobilizer System·························································3-7
In case of an emergency while driving····························6-2
Indicators, Warnings and ···············································4-32
Infants and Small Children, Restraint of·······················3-41
Inspections, Necessary·····················································5-5
Instrument
Cluster··········································································4-25
Panel Illumination ·······················································4-27
Panel Overview ·····························································2-3
Interior
Care··············································································7-51
Features········································································3-91
Lights···········································································3-88
Overview ·······································································2-2
Trim, Cleaning the Upholstery and·····························7-51
Window Glass, Cleaning the·······································7-51
Intermittent Wipers, Variable·········································4-42
Jacking Instructions·······················································6-24
Jump Starting···································································6-4
Keyless Entry, Remote ····················································3-4
Key Reminder Warning Chime ·····································4-36
Keys·················································································3-2
Knowing Your Vehicle·····················································3-1
H
I
J
K
Index
6
10
Label
Information··································································5-25
Tire Specification/Pressure··········································5-26
Lamp, Door Courtesy····················································3-88
Lap/Shoulder Belt··························································3-36
Rear··············································································3-38
Webbing, Cleaning the ················································7-51
Light
Bulbs (Specifications) ···················································8-2
Bulb Replacement, Headlight······································7-41
Bulb Replacement, Interior ·········································7-43
Bulb Replacement, License Plate································7-44
Bulb Replacement, Rear Combination························7-44
Dome ···········································································3-88
Interior·········································································3-88
Map··············································································3-88
Lighter, Cigarette···························································3-91
Lighting Control ····························································4-41
Locks, Door ·····································································3-9
Low Fuel Level Warning···············································4-34
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indicator·················4-35
Lubricant Specifications················································7-46
Lubricants and Fluids ····················································7-20
Lumbar Support·····························································3-21
Main Fuse ········································································6-9
Maintenance·····································································7-1
Normal - Schedule························································ 7-3
Owner ············································································7-9
Severe - Schedule··························································7-6
Services··········································································7-2
Malfunction Indicator····················································4-34
Mirror·············································································3-84
Day/Night Rearview····················································3-86
Outside Rearview ························································3-84
Modifications, Vehicle·····················································5-3
Odometer ·······································································4-26
Oil
Level, Checking the Engine········································7-13
Pressure Warning, Engine ···········································4-32
One-Touch Wiper···························································4-43
Outside Rearview Mirror···············································3-84
Overheating······································································6-3
Owner Maintenance·························································7-9
Precautions···································································7-11
L M
O
10
7
Index
Parking
Brake············································································4-13
Brake and Brake Fluid Warning··································4-33
Power
Brakes··········································································4-10
Outlet···········································································3-94
Steering ······························································4-17, 7-17
Steering Fluid Level, Checking the·····························7-17
Windows······································································3-14
Pregnant Women, Restraint of·······································3-40
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt ··················································3-30
Proper Use and Care of the Safety Belt System············3-40
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals·························9-6
Rain, Driving in the·························································5-8
Rear
Lap/Shoulder Belt························································3-38
Seat ··············································································3-25
Window Defroster ·······················································4-44
Rearview Mirror
Day/Night ····································································3-86
Outside·········································································3-84
Recharging, Battery·······················································7-27
Registering Your Vehicle in a Foreign Country ··············9-3
Reminder Warning Chime, Key ····································4-36
Remote Keyless Entry·····················································3-4
Reporting Safety Defects·················································9-5
Restraint
of Infants and Small Children·····································3-41
of Larger Children·······················································3-42
of Pregnant Women·····················································3-40
System, Child ······························································3-43
System, Safety Belt ·····················································3-32
Roadside Assistance, Emergency ····································9-2
Road Warning ··································································6-2
Rocking the Vehicle·························································5-7
Rotation, Tire·································································7-31
Safety Belt ·····································································3-30
Restraint System··························································3-32
System, Proper Use and Care of ·································3-40
Warning Light······························································4-32
Warning Chime····························································4-36
Warning Light and Chime···········································3-35
Safety Chains·································································5-21
Safety Lock, Rear Door Child·······································3-12
Scheduled
Maintenance Service ·····················································7-2
1 - Normal Maintenance················································7-3
2 - Severe Maintenance·················································7-6
P
R
S
Index
8
10
Seat·················································································3-17
Adjustment ··································································3-19
Warming and Ventilating the Front·····························3-23
Snow Tires····························································5-10, 7-40
Spare Tire, Removing the··············································6-22
Special Driving Conditions ·············································5-7
Specifications···································································8-2
Lubricant······································································7-46
Speedometer···································································4-26
Starting
Emergency, Jump ··························································6-4
the Engine······································································4-4
Steering
Column Lock, Ignition Switch and Anti-Theft·············4-2
Power ·································································4-17, 7-17
Wheel···········································································4-17
Tilt················································································4-18
Storage Compartments···················································3-89
Suggestions for Economical Operation···························5-6
Storing the Jack and Tools·············································6-22
Storing the Spare Tire····················································6-22
Sunglass Holder·····························································3-90
Sunroof···········································································3-96
Sunvisor·········································································3-93
Switch, Ignition································································4-2
Tachometer·····································································4-26
Temperature
Control Knob·······························································4-48
Gauge, Engine ·····························································4-26
Tilt Steering ···································································4-18
Tips for Towing a Stuck Vehicle ···································6-17
Tire
and Wheels ··································································7-29
Balance, Wheel Alignment and···································7-32
Care··············································································7-29
Chains·································································5-10, 7-40
Changing······································································6-24
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)················4-37, 6-17
Quality Grading, Uniform···········································7-36
Replacement·······················································6-24, 7-32
Rotation ·······································································7-31
Size Designation··························································7-34
Snow···································································5-10, 7-40
Speed Ratings······························································7-35
Specifications ································································8-3
Toll-Free Consumer Assistance·······································9-2
Towing ···········································································6-13
With a Vehicle Other Than a Tow Truck·····················6-15
Trailer
Brakes··········································································5-21
Driving with a······························································5-21
T
10
9
Index
Towing·········································································5-18
Weight of the ·······························································5-19
Transaxle, Automatic··············································4-5, 7-18
Trip
Interruption····································································9-3
Meter············································································4-26
Trunk··············································································3-76
Turn Signals···································································4-40
Two-Way Radio System, Installation of a Mobile··········9-4
Underbody Maintenance················································7-50
Uniform Tire Quality Grading·······································7-36
Upholstery and Interior Trim, Cleaning the ··················7-51
Vehicle
at a Glance, Your···························································2-1
Break-In Process····························································1-3
Data Collection and Event Data Recorders···················1-4
Driving Your··································································4-1
Identification Number ·················································5-25
Knowing Your ·······························································3-1
Load Limit···································································5-13
Modifications·································································5-3
Rocking the····································································5-7
Ventilating the Front Seats·············································3-23
Warming the Front Seats ···············································3-23
Warning
and Indicators ······························································4-31
Road···············································································6-2
Washer
Fluid Level, Checking the···········································7-20
Wipers and···································································4-42
Washing··········································································7-48
Waxing···········································································7-49
Weight
of the Vehicle·······························································5-17
of the Trailer Tongue···················································5-20
Wheel
Alignment and Tire Balance········································7-32
Aluminum, Maintenance·············································7-50
Replacement ································································7-33
Size Designation··························································7-35
Steering········································································4-17
Wheels, Tires and ··························································7-29
Window··········································································3-13
Glass, Cleaning the Interior·········································7-51
Windows, Power····························································3-14
Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging···········································4-56
U
V
W
Index
10
10
Washers········································································4-43
Wiper Blade Replacement···········································7-24
Winter Driving·································································5-9
Wiper Blades··································································7-24
Wipers
and Washers·································································4-42
Variable Intermittent····················································4-42
One-Touch···································································4-43
Your Vehicle At A Glance················································2-1
Y
